Post on 17-Jan-2016
description
transcript
Acer AL1916W
Service Guide
Service guide files and updates are available on the CSD web for more information Please refer to httpcsdacercomtw
- 1 -
Copyright Copyright copy 2006 by Acer Incorporated All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted
transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any
means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written permission
of Acer Incorporated
Disclaimer The information in this guide is subject to change without notice Acer Incorporated makes no representations or
warranties either expresses or implied with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any warranties of
merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Any Acer Incorporated software described in this manual is sold or
licensed ldquoas is rdquo Should the programs prove defective following their purchase the buyer (and not Acer Incorporated
its distributor of its dealer) assumes the entire cost of all necessary servicing repair and any incidental or
consequential damages resulting from any defect in the software
Acer is a registered trademark of Acer Corporation
Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation
Pentium and Pentium IIIII are trademarks of Intel Corporation
Other brand and product names are trademarks andor registered trademarks of their respective holders
- 2 -
Conventions The following conventions are used in this manual
Screen messages Denotes actual messages that appear on screen
Note Gives bits and pieces of additional information related to the current topic
Warning Alerts you to any damage that might result from doing or not doing specific actions
Caution Gives precautionary measures to avoid possible hardware or software problems
Important Reminds you to do specific actions relevant to the accomplishment of procedures
Preface Before using this information and the product it supports please read the following general information
1 this Service Guide provides you with all technical information relating to the BASICCONFIGURATION
decided for Acerrsquos ldquoglobalrdquo product offering To better fit local market requirements and enhance product
competitiveness your regional office MAY have decided to extend the functionality of a machine (eg
add-on card modem or extra memory capability) These LOCALIZED FEATURES will NOT be covered
in this generic service guide In such cases please contact your regional offices or the responsible
personnelchannel to provide you with further technical details
2 please not WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information
available on your regional web or channel If for whatever reason a part number change is made it will
not be noted in the printed Service Guide for ACER-AUTHORIZED SERVICE PROVIDERS your Acer
office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts for repair and
Service of customer machines
- 3 -
WARNING (FOR FCC CERTIFIED MODELS) NOTE this equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception
Which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures
1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
2 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver
3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected
4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radioTV technician for help
Warning Use only shielded signal cables to connect IO devices to this equipment You are cautioned that changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for comliance could viold your authority to operate the
equipment
As an ENERGY STARreg Partner our company has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STARreg
guidelines for energy efficiency
WARNING
To prevent fire or chock hazard do not expose the monitor to rain or moisture Dangerously high voltages are
present inside the monitor Do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only
- 4 -
PRECAUTIONS Do not use the monitor near water eg near a bathtub washbowl kitchen sink laundry tub
Swimming pool or in a wet basement
Do not place the monitor on an unstable trolley stand or table If the monitor falls it can injure a person and
cause serious damage to the appliance Use only a trolley or stand recommended by the manufacture or sold
with the monitor If you mount the monitor on a wall or shelf use a mounting kit approved by the manufacture and
follow the kit instructions
Slots and openings in the back and bottom of the cabinet area provided for ventilation To ensure reliable
operation of the monitor and to protect it from overheating be sure these openings are not blocked or covered
Do not place the monitor on a bed sofa rug or similar surface Do not place the monitor near or over a radiator
or heat register Do not place the monitor in a bookcase or cabinet unless proper ventilation is provided
The monitor should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the label If you are not sure of
the type of power supplied to your home consult your dealer or local power company
The monitor is equipped with a three-pronged grounded plug a plug with a third (grounding) pin This plug will fit
only into a grounded power outlet as a safety feature If your outlet does not accommodate the three-wire plug
have an electrician install the correct outlet or use an adapter to ground the appliance safely Do not defeat the
safety purpose of the grounded plug
Unplug the unit during a lightning storm or when it will not be used for long periods of time This will protect the
monitor from damage due to power surges
Do not overload power strips and extension cords Overloading can result in fire or electric shock
Never push any object into the slot on the monitor cabinet It could short circuit parts causing a fire or electric
shock Never spill liquids on the monitor
Do not attempt to service the monitor yourself opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous
voltages and other hazards Please refer all servicing to qualified service personnel
To ensure satisfactory operation use the monitor only with UL listed computers which have appropriate
configured receptacles marked between 100-240V AC Min 35A
The wall socket shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible
- 5 -
SPECIAL NOTES ON LCD MONITORS
The following symptoms are normal with LCD monitor and do not indicate a problem
NOTES Due to the nature of the fluorescent light the screen may flicker during initial use Turn off the Power Switch and
then turn it on again to make sure the flicker disappears
You may find slightly uneven brightness in the screen depending on the desktop pattern you use
The LCD screen has effective pixels of 9999 or more It may include blemishes of 001 or less such as a
missing pixel or a pixel lit all of the time
Due to the nature of the LCD screen an afterimage of the previous screen may remain after switching the image
when the same image is displayed for hours In this case the screen is recovered slowly by changing the image or
turning off the Power Switch for hours
- 6 -
Table of contents Chapter 1 Monitor Feature helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip8 INTRODUCTION8 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMEENTS9 MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM 21 BLOCK DIAGRAM 24 MONITOR BOARD LAYOUT 25 SOFTWARE FLOW CHART 27 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 28 SYSTEM INSTALLATION 29 POWERINVERTOR BOARD 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION 35 SAFETY 37
Chapter 2 Operating Instruction helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip39 CONTROLS 39 MAIN OSD MENU 40 OSD MESSAGE 42 PLUG AND PLAY 44 WHITE COLOR TEMPERATURE 45 AUDIO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 45
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip47 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 47
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip50 TROUBLESHOOTING 54
Chapter 5 Connector Information helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip55 CONNECTOR INFORMATION 58
Chapter 6 FRU List helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 59 PART LIST 55
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip60 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 60
- 7 -
Chapter 1 Monitor Feature INTRODUCTION Scope This specification defines the requirements for the 19rdquo MICRO-PROCESSOR based Multi-mode supported high resolution color LCD monitor This monitor can be directly connected to general 15 pin D-sub VGA connector and eliminates the requirement of optional special display card It also supports VESA DPMS power management and plug amp play function There is a build-in stereo audio amplifier with volume control to drive a pair of speakers
Description The LCD monitor is designed with the latest LCD technology to provide a performance oriented product with no radiation This will alleviate the growing health concerns It is also a space saving design allowing more desktop space and comparing to the traditional CRT monitor it consumes less power and gets less weight in addition MTBF target is 20k hours or more
Comparison Chart of AL1916 AW698 AW998
Panel Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Signal Interface DSUB D-SUB amp DVI-D Sync Type for analog input Separate compatible Separate compatible
Color Temp user adjust Support Support DDC DDC2B DDC2B Speaker NO NO
Headphone Jack NO NO
Microphone Jack No No
USB Hub Not support Not support
Tilt Swivel Yes No No No
Height Adjust Option Option
- 8 -
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Standard Test Conditions All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified Ambient light 225 lux Viewing distance 50 cm in front of LCD panel Warrn up time All specifications 30 minutes Fully functional 5 seconds Measuring Equipment Chroma 2250 signal generator or equivalent directly Connected to the monitor under test Minolta CA100 photometer or equivalent Control settings User brightness control Maximum (unless otherwise specified ) User contrast control Typical (unless otherwise specified ) User redwhite balance Greenwhite balance and Bluewhite balance control In the center (unless otherwise specified ) Power input 110Vac or 230Vac Ambient temperature 20 plusmn 5 ˚C ( 68 plusmn 9 ˚ F) Analog input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
The units of measure stated in this document are listed below
Digital input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz (option)
1 gamma = 1 nano tesla 1 tesla = 10000 gauss
cm = in x 254 lb = kg x 22
degrees F = [degC x 18] + 32 degrees C = [degF - 32]18
u = 4x(-2x + 12y + 3) v = 9y(-2x + 12y + 3)
x = (27u4)[(9u2) - 12v + 9] y = (3v)[(9u2) - 12v + 9]
nits = cd(m2) = Ft-L x 3426 lux = foot-candle x 1076
- 9 -
LCD monitor General specification Panel Type 19 ldquo active matrix color TFT LCD
Display size 40824 mm (H) x25515 mm (V) PC interface 1) Video RGB analog 07V peak to peak
Sync TTL positive or negative Signal connector 15 pin Mini D type (standard VGA video)
24pin DVI-D type (DVI) (option) Front control power onoff with LED select adjustment (+-) Interface frequency Horizontal Frequency 30KHz ----80KHz Vertical Frequency 49Hz ------75Hz Plug amp play Support VESA DDC2B functions Power Input voltage Single phase 5060HZ 100VAC to 240VAC plusmn10 Total output power 55 Watt max
- 10 -
LCD Panel Specification
Note 1) Definition of Viewing Angle Viewing angle range (10leCR)
- 11 -
Note 2) Definition of Contrast Ratio (CR) Ratio of gray max(Gmax)gray min(Gmin) at the
center point of panel Luminance with all pixels white (Gmax)
CR= Luminance with all pixels black (Gmin)
Note 3) Definition of Response time Sum of TR TF
Note 4) After stabilizing and leaving the panel alone at a given temperature for 30 min the measurement should be executed Measurement should be executed n a stable windless and dark room30 min after lighting the back-light This should be measured in the center of screen Dual lamp current 130mA(65mA x2)(Refer to the note(1) in the page 14 for more information )
Environment condition Ta=25plusmn2degC
- 12 -
Optical characteristics measurement setup Notes 5) Definition of Luminance of White measure the luminance of white at center point
Notes 6)Definition of 9 points brightness uniformity (Measuring points Refer to the Note 5) AU Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Samsumg Bmax-Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Bmax Maximum brightness Bmin Minimum brightness Notes 7) Definition of Flicker level Flicker Voltage pp F = x 100 LMD Voltage dc diams One maximum value of three estimated values diams For this test an LMD(Light Measurement Device)is needed with adequate response time
to track any visible rate flicker component and with a voltage level output proportional To luminance intensity
- 13 -
diams Test Pattern For dot inversion Driving(Gray levels of foreground dots on the test panel Are G22G32and G45)
diams Test Point Center point of the display area N
Ta W
diams
diams
ote 8) Definition of Crosstalk (Refer to the VESA STD)
he calculation for shadowing is made from the 2 luminance measurements Gbkg and Lsh s follows Lmax -Lmin CT = x100 Lmin
here Lmax is the larger value of Gbkg or Lsh and Lmin is the smaller of the two To determine background and foreground levels (colors)first set the background to any gray scale or color level suitable for shadowing determination(Note that it may take several iterations of adjusting background level and box levels to determine the proper value for the background Next display the box levels to determine the proper value for the background level Look for shadowing in any direction from box E Independently vary the gray level (or color) of the background and box E until the worst case shadowing is observed This defines the background (Gbkg) and foreground (Gfg) levels to be maintained for the remainder of the test
One point only (the target) will be measured To determine that point proceed as follows Using the background and foreground gray levels of step1 (Gbkg and Gfg) Turn on each box at a time Look for the case with the worst shadowing The box causing the worst case is the shadowing source or Bsrc Use Bsrc and the box opposite from it that lies directly in
- 14 -
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Copyright Copyright copy 2006 by Acer Incorporated All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted
transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language or computer language in any form or by any
means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical manual or otherwise without the prior written permission
of Acer Incorporated
Disclaimer The information in this guide is subject to change without notice Acer Incorporated makes no representations or
warranties either expresses or implied with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any warranties of
merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose Any Acer Incorporated software described in this manual is sold or
licensed ldquoas is rdquo Should the programs prove defective following their purchase the buyer (and not Acer Incorporated
its distributor of its dealer) assumes the entire cost of all necessary servicing repair and any incidental or
consequential damages resulting from any defect in the software
Acer is a registered trademark of Acer Corporation
Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation
Pentium and Pentium IIIII are trademarks of Intel Corporation
Other brand and product names are trademarks andor registered trademarks of their respective holders
- 2 -
Conventions The following conventions are used in this manual
Screen messages Denotes actual messages that appear on screen
Note Gives bits and pieces of additional information related to the current topic
Warning Alerts you to any damage that might result from doing or not doing specific actions
Caution Gives precautionary measures to avoid possible hardware or software problems
Important Reminds you to do specific actions relevant to the accomplishment of procedures
Preface Before using this information and the product it supports please read the following general information
1 this Service Guide provides you with all technical information relating to the BASICCONFIGURATION
decided for Acerrsquos ldquoglobalrdquo product offering To better fit local market requirements and enhance product
competitiveness your regional office MAY have decided to extend the functionality of a machine (eg
add-on card modem or extra memory capability) These LOCALIZED FEATURES will NOT be covered
in this generic service guide In such cases please contact your regional offices or the responsible
personnelchannel to provide you with further technical details
2 please not WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information
available on your regional web or channel If for whatever reason a part number change is made it will
not be noted in the printed Service Guide for ACER-AUTHORIZED SERVICE PROVIDERS your Acer
office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts for repair and
Service of customer machines
- 3 -
WARNING (FOR FCC CERTIFIED MODELS) NOTE this equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception
Which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures
1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
2 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver
3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected
4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radioTV technician for help
Warning Use only shielded signal cables to connect IO devices to this equipment You are cautioned that changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for comliance could viold your authority to operate the
equipment
As an ENERGY STARreg Partner our company has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STARreg
guidelines for energy efficiency
WARNING
To prevent fire or chock hazard do not expose the monitor to rain or moisture Dangerously high voltages are
present inside the monitor Do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only
- 4 -
PRECAUTIONS Do not use the monitor near water eg near a bathtub washbowl kitchen sink laundry tub
Swimming pool or in a wet basement
Do not place the monitor on an unstable trolley stand or table If the monitor falls it can injure a person and
cause serious damage to the appliance Use only a trolley or stand recommended by the manufacture or sold
with the monitor If you mount the monitor on a wall or shelf use a mounting kit approved by the manufacture and
follow the kit instructions
Slots and openings in the back and bottom of the cabinet area provided for ventilation To ensure reliable
operation of the monitor and to protect it from overheating be sure these openings are not blocked or covered
Do not place the monitor on a bed sofa rug or similar surface Do not place the monitor near or over a radiator
or heat register Do not place the monitor in a bookcase or cabinet unless proper ventilation is provided
The monitor should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the label If you are not sure of
the type of power supplied to your home consult your dealer or local power company
The monitor is equipped with a three-pronged grounded plug a plug with a third (grounding) pin This plug will fit
only into a grounded power outlet as a safety feature If your outlet does not accommodate the three-wire plug
have an electrician install the correct outlet or use an adapter to ground the appliance safely Do not defeat the
safety purpose of the grounded plug
Unplug the unit during a lightning storm or when it will not be used for long periods of time This will protect the
monitor from damage due to power surges
Do not overload power strips and extension cords Overloading can result in fire or electric shock
Never push any object into the slot on the monitor cabinet It could short circuit parts causing a fire or electric
shock Never spill liquids on the monitor
Do not attempt to service the monitor yourself opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous
voltages and other hazards Please refer all servicing to qualified service personnel
To ensure satisfactory operation use the monitor only with UL listed computers which have appropriate
configured receptacles marked between 100-240V AC Min 35A
The wall socket shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible
- 5 -
SPECIAL NOTES ON LCD MONITORS
The following symptoms are normal with LCD monitor and do not indicate a problem
NOTES Due to the nature of the fluorescent light the screen may flicker during initial use Turn off the Power Switch and
then turn it on again to make sure the flicker disappears
You may find slightly uneven brightness in the screen depending on the desktop pattern you use
The LCD screen has effective pixels of 9999 or more It may include blemishes of 001 or less such as a
missing pixel or a pixel lit all of the time
Due to the nature of the LCD screen an afterimage of the previous screen may remain after switching the image
when the same image is displayed for hours In this case the screen is recovered slowly by changing the image or
turning off the Power Switch for hours
- 6 -
Table of contents Chapter 1 Monitor Feature helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip8 INTRODUCTION8 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMEENTS9 MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM 21 BLOCK DIAGRAM 24 MONITOR BOARD LAYOUT 25 SOFTWARE FLOW CHART 27 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 28 SYSTEM INSTALLATION 29 POWERINVERTOR BOARD 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION 35 SAFETY 37
Chapter 2 Operating Instruction helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip39 CONTROLS 39 MAIN OSD MENU 40 OSD MESSAGE 42 PLUG AND PLAY 44 WHITE COLOR TEMPERATURE 45 AUDIO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 45
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip47 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 47
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip50 TROUBLESHOOTING 54
Chapter 5 Connector Information helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip55 CONNECTOR INFORMATION 58
Chapter 6 FRU List helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 59 PART LIST 55
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip60 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 60
- 7 -
Chapter 1 Monitor Feature INTRODUCTION Scope This specification defines the requirements for the 19rdquo MICRO-PROCESSOR based Multi-mode supported high resolution color LCD monitor This monitor can be directly connected to general 15 pin D-sub VGA connector and eliminates the requirement of optional special display card It also supports VESA DPMS power management and plug amp play function There is a build-in stereo audio amplifier with volume control to drive a pair of speakers
Description The LCD monitor is designed with the latest LCD technology to provide a performance oriented product with no radiation This will alleviate the growing health concerns It is also a space saving design allowing more desktop space and comparing to the traditional CRT monitor it consumes less power and gets less weight in addition MTBF target is 20k hours or more
Comparison Chart of AL1916 AW698 AW998
Panel Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Signal Interface DSUB D-SUB amp DVI-D Sync Type for analog input Separate compatible Separate compatible
Color Temp user adjust Support Support DDC DDC2B DDC2B Speaker NO NO
Headphone Jack NO NO
Microphone Jack No No
USB Hub Not support Not support
Tilt Swivel Yes No No No
Height Adjust Option Option
- 8 -
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Standard Test Conditions All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified Ambient light 225 lux Viewing distance 50 cm in front of LCD panel Warrn up time All specifications 30 minutes Fully functional 5 seconds Measuring Equipment Chroma 2250 signal generator or equivalent directly Connected to the monitor under test Minolta CA100 photometer or equivalent Control settings User brightness control Maximum (unless otherwise specified ) User contrast control Typical (unless otherwise specified ) User redwhite balance Greenwhite balance and Bluewhite balance control In the center (unless otherwise specified ) Power input 110Vac or 230Vac Ambient temperature 20 plusmn 5 ˚C ( 68 plusmn 9 ˚ F) Analog input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
The units of measure stated in this document are listed below
Digital input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz (option)
1 gamma = 1 nano tesla 1 tesla = 10000 gauss
cm = in x 254 lb = kg x 22
degrees F = [degC x 18] + 32 degrees C = [degF - 32]18
u = 4x(-2x + 12y + 3) v = 9y(-2x + 12y + 3)
x = (27u4)[(9u2) - 12v + 9] y = (3v)[(9u2) - 12v + 9]
nits = cd(m2) = Ft-L x 3426 lux = foot-candle x 1076
- 9 -
LCD monitor General specification Panel Type 19 ldquo active matrix color TFT LCD
Display size 40824 mm (H) x25515 mm (V) PC interface 1) Video RGB analog 07V peak to peak
Sync TTL positive or negative Signal connector 15 pin Mini D type (standard VGA video)
24pin DVI-D type (DVI) (option) Front control power onoff with LED select adjustment (+-) Interface frequency Horizontal Frequency 30KHz ----80KHz Vertical Frequency 49Hz ------75Hz Plug amp play Support VESA DDC2B functions Power Input voltage Single phase 5060HZ 100VAC to 240VAC plusmn10 Total output power 55 Watt max
- 10 -
LCD Panel Specification
Note 1) Definition of Viewing Angle Viewing angle range (10leCR)
- 11 -
Note 2) Definition of Contrast Ratio (CR) Ratio of gray max(Gmax)gray min(Gmin) at the
center point of panel Luminance with all pixels white (Gmax)
CR= Luminance with all pixels black (Gmin)
Note 3) Definition of Response time Sum of TR TF
Note 4) After stabilizing and leaving the panel alone at a given temperature for 30 min the measurement should be executed Measurement should be executed n a stable windless and dark room30 min after lighting the back-light This should be measured in the center of screen Dual lamp current 130mA(65mA x2)(Refer to the note(1) in the page 14 for more information )
Environment condition Ta=25plusmn2degC
- 12 -
Optical characteristics measurement setup Notes 5) Definition of Luminance of White measure the luminance of white at center point
Notes 6)Definition of 9 points brightness uniformity (Measuring points Refer to the Note 5) AU Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Samsumg Bmax-Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Bmax Maximum brightness Bmin Minimum brightness Notes 7) Definition of Flicker level Flicker Voltage pp F = x 100 LMD Voltage dc diams One maximum value of three estimated values diams For this test an LMD(Light Measurement Device)is needed with adequate response time
to track any visible rate flicker component and with a voltage level output proportional To luminance intensity
- 13 -
diams Test Pattern For dot inversion Driving(Gray levels of foreground dots on the test panel Are G22G32and G45)
diams Test Point Center point of the display area N
Ta W
diams
diams
ote 8) Definition of Crosstalk (Refer to the VESA STD)
he calculation for shadowing is made from the 2 luminance measurements Gbkg and Lsh s follows Lmax -Lmin CT = x100 Lmin
here Lmax is the larger value of Gbkg or Lsh and Lmin is the smaller of the two To determine background and foreground levels (colors)first set the background to any gray scale or color level suitable for shadowing determination(Note that it may take several iterations of adjusting background level and box levels to determine the proper value for the background Next display the box levels to determine the proper value for the background level Look for shadowing in any direction from box E Independently vary the gray level (or color) of the background and box E until the worst case shadowing is observed This defines the background (Gbkg) and foreground (Gfg) levels to be maintained for the remainder of the test
One point only (the target) will be measured To determine that point proceed as follows Using the background and foreground gray levels of step1 (Gbkg and Gfg) Turn on each box at a time Look for the case with the worst shadowing The box causing the worst case is the shadowing source or Bsrc Use Bsrc and the box opposite from it that lies directly in
- 14 -
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Conventions The following conventions are used in this manual
Screen messages Denotes actual messages that appear on screen
Note Gives bits and pieces of additional information related to the current topic
Warning Alerts you to any damage that might result from doing or not doing specific actions
Caution Gives precautionary measures to avoid possible hardware or software problems
Important Reminds you to do specific actions relevant to the accomplishment of procedures
Preface Before using this information and the product it supports please read the following general information
1 this Service Guide provides you with all technical information relating to the BASICCONFIGURATION
decided for Acerrsquos ldquoglobalrdquo product offering To better fit local market requirements and enhance product
competitiveness your regional office MAY have decided to extend the functionality of a machine (eg
add-on card modem or extra memory capability) These LOCALIZED FEATURES will NOT be covered
in this generic service guide In such cases please contact your regional offices or the responsible
personnelchannel to provide you with further technical details
2 please not WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information
available on your regional web or channel If for whatever reason a part number change is made it will
not be noted in the printed Service Guide for ACER-AUTHORIZED SERVICE PROVIDERS your Acer
office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts for repair and
Service of customer machines
- 3 -
WARNING (FOR FCC CERTIFIED MODELS) NOTE this equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception
Which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures
1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
2 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver
3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected
4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radioTV technician for help
Warning Use only shielded signal cables to connect IO devices to this equipment You are cautioned that changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for comliance could viold your authority to operate the
equipment
As an ENERGY STARreg Partner our company has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STARreg
guidelines for energy efficiency
WARNING
To prevent fire or chock hazard do not expose the monitor to rain or moisture Dangerously high voltages are
present inside the monitor Do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only
- 4 -
PRECAUTIONS Do not use the monitor near water eg near a bathtub washbowl kitchen sink laundry tub
Swimming pool or in a wet basement
Do not place the monitor on an unstable trolley stand or table If the monitor falls it can injure a person and
cause serious damage to the appliance Use only a trolley or stand recommended by the manufacture or sold
with the monitor If you mount the monitor on a wall or shelf use a mounting kit approved by the manufacture and
follow the kit instructions
Slots and openings in the back and bottom of the cabinet area provided for ventilation To ensure reliable
operation of the monitor and to protect it from overheating be sure these openings are not blocked or covered
Do not place the monitor on a bed sofa rug or similar surface Do not place the monitor near or over a radiator
or heat register Do not place the monitor in a bookcase or cabinet unless proper ventilation is provided
The monitor should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the label If you are not sure of
the type of power supplied to your home consult your dealer or local power company
The monitor is equipped with a three-pronged grounded plug a plug with a third (grounding) pin This plug will fit
only into a grounded power outlet as a safety feature If your outlet does not accommodate the three-wire plug
have an electrician install the correct outlet or use an adapter to ground the appliance safely Do not defeat the
safety purpose of the grounded plug
Unplug the unit during a lightning storm or when it will not be used for long periods of time This will protect the
monitor from damage due to power surges
Do not overload power strips and extension cords Overloading can result in fire or electric shock
Never push any object into the slot on the monitor cabinet It could short circuit parts causing a fire or electric
shock Never spill liquids on the monitor
Do not attempt to service the monitor yourself opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous
voltages and other hazards Please refer all servicing to qualified service personnel
To ensure satisfactory operation use the monitor only with UL listed computers which have appropriate
configured receptacles marked between 100-240V AC Min 35A
The wall socket shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible
- 5 -
SPECIAL NOTES ON LCD MONITORS
The following symptoms are normal with LCD monitor and do not indicate a problem
NOTES Due to the nature of the fluorescent light the screen may flicker during initial use Turn off the Power Switch and
then turn it on again to make sure the flicker disappears
You may find slightly uneven brightness in the screen depending on the desktop pattern you use
The LCD screen has effective pixels of 9999 or more It may include blemishes of 001 or less such as a
missing pixel or a pixel lit all of the time
Due to the nature of the LCD screen an afterimage of the previous screen may remain after switching the image
when the same image is displayed for hours In this case the screen is recovered slowly by changing the image or
turning off the Power Switch for hours
- 6 -
Table of contents Chapter 1 Monitor Feature helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip8 INTRODUCTION8 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMEENTS9 MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM 21 BLOCK DIAGRAM 24 MONITOR BOARD LAYOUT 25 SOFTWARE FLOW CHART 27 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 28 SYSTEM INSTALLATION 29 POWERINVERTOR BOARD 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION 35 SAFETY 37
Chapter 2 Operating Instruction helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip39 CONTROLS 39 MAIN OSD MENU 40 OSD MESSAGE 42 PLUG AND PLAY 44 WHITE COLOR TEMPERATURE 45 AUDIO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 45
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip47 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 47
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip50 TROUBLESHOOTING 54
Chapter 5 Connector Information helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip55 CONNECTOR INFORMATION 58
Chapter 6 FRU List helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 59 PART LIST 55
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip60 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 60
- 7 -
Chapter 1 Monitor Feature INTRODUCTION Scope This specification defines the requirements for the 19rdquo MICRO-PROCESSOR based Multi-mode supported high resolution color LCD monitor This monitor can be directly connected to general 15 pin D-sub VGA connector and eliminates the requirement of optional special display card It also supports VESA DPMS power management and plug amp play function There is a build-in stereo audio amplifier with volume control to drive a pair of speakers
Description The LCD monitor is designed with the latest LCD technology to provide a performance oriented product with no radiation This will alleviate the growing health concerns It is also a space saving design allowing more desktop space and comparing to the traditional CRT monitor it consumes less power and gets less weight in addition MTBF target is 20k hours or more
Comparison Chart of AL1916 AW698 AW998
Panel Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Signal Interface DSUB D-SUB amp DVI-D Sync Type for analog input Separate compatible Separate compatible
Color Temp user adjust Support Support DDC DDC2B DDC2B Speaker NO NO
Headphone Jack NO NO
Microphone Jack No No
USB Hub Not support Not support
Tilt Swivel Yes No No No
Height Adjust Option Option
- 8 -
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Standard Test Conditions All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified Ambient light 225 lux Viewing distance 50 cm in front of LCD panel Warrn up time All specifications 30 minutes Fully functional 5 seconds Measuring Equipment Chroma 2250 signal generator or equivalent directly Connected to the monitor under test Minolta CA100 photometer or equivalent Control settings User brightness control Maximum (unless otherwise specified ) User contrast control Typical (unless otherwise specified ) User redwhite balance Greenwhite balance and Bluewhite balance control In the center (unless otherwise specified ) Power input 110Vac or 230Vac Ambient temperature 20 plusmn 5 ˚C ( 68 plusmn 9 ˚ F) Analog input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
The units of measure stated in this document are listed below
Digital input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz (option)
1 gamma = 1 nano tesla 1 tesla = 10000 gauss
cm = in x 254 lb = kg x 22
degrees F = [degC x 18] + 32 degrees C = [degF - 32]18
u = 4x(-2x + 12y + 3) v = 9y(-2x + 12y + 3)
x = (27u4)[(9u2) - 12v + 9] y = (3v)[(9u2) - 12v + 9]
nits = cd(m2) = Ft-L x 3426 lux = foot-candle x 1076
- 9 -
LCD monitor General specification Panel Type 19 ldquo active matrix color TFT LCD
Display size 40824 mm (H) x25515 mm (V) PC interface 1) Video RGB analog 07V peak to peak
Sync TTL positive or negative Signal connector 15 pin Mini D type (standard VGA video)
24pin DVI-D type (DVI) (option) Front control power onoff with LED select adjustment (+-) Interface frequency Horizontal Frequency 30KHz ----80KHz Vertical Frequency 49Hz ------75Hz Plug amp play Support VESA DDC2B functions Power Input voltage Single phase 5060HZ 100VAC to 240VAC plusmn10 Total output power 55 Watt max
- 10 -
LCD Panel Specification
Note 1) Definition of Viewing Angle Viewing angle range (10leCR)
- 11 -
Note 2) Definition of Contrast Ratio (CR) Ratio of gray max(Gmax)gray min(Gmin) at the
center point of panel Luminance with all pixels white (Gmax)
CR= Luminance with all pixels black (Gmin)
Note 3) Definition of Response time Sum of TR TF
Note 4) After stabilizing and leaving the panel alone at a given temperature for 30 min the measurement should be executed Measurement should be executed n a stable windless and dark room30 min after lighting the back-light This should be measured in the center of screen Dual lamp current 130mA(65mA x2)(Refer to the note(1) in the page 14 for more information )
Environment condition Ta=25plusmn2degC
- 12 -
Optical characteristics measurement setup Notes 5) Definition of Luminance of White measure the luminance of white at center point
Notes 6)Definition of 9 points brightness uniformity (Measuring points Refer to the Note 5) AU Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Samsumg Bmax-Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Bmax Maximum brightness Bmin Minimum brightness Notes 7) Definition of Flicker level Flicker Voltage pp F = x 100 LMD Voltage dc diams One maximum value of three estimated values diams For this test an LMD(Light Measurement Device)is needed with adequate response time
to track any visible rate flicker component and with a voltage level output proportional To luminance intensity
- 13 -
diams Test Pattern For dot inversion Driving(Gray levels of foreground dots on the test panel Are G22G32and G45)
diams Test Point Center point of the display area N
Ta W
diams
diams
ote 8) Definition of Crosstalk (Refer to the VESA STD)
he calculation for shadowing is made from the 2 luminance measurements Gbkg and Lsh s follows Lmax -Lmin CT = x100 Lmin
here Lmax is the larger value of Gbkg or Lsh and Lmin is the smaller of the two To determine background and foreground levels (colors)first set the background to any gray scale or color level suitable for shadowing determination(Note that it may take several iterations of adjusting background level and box levels to determine the proper value for the background Next display the box levels to determine the proper value for the background level Look for shadowing in any direction from box E Independently vary the gray level (or color) of the background and box E until the worst case shadowing is observed This defines the background (Gbkg) and foreground (Gfg) levels to be maintained for the remainder of the test
One point only (the target) will be measured To determine that point proceed as follows Using the background and foreground gray levels of step1 (Gbkg and Gfg) Turn on each box at a time Look for the case with the worst shadowing The box causing the worst case is the shadowing source or Bsrc Use Bsrc and the box opposite from it that lies directly in
- 14 -
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
WARNING (FOR FCC CERTIFIED MODELS) NOTE this equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is
no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception
Which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures
1 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna
2 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver
3 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected
4 Consult the dealer or an experienced radioTV technician for help
Warning Use only shielded signal cables to connect IO devices to this equipment You are cautioned that changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for comliance could viold your authority to operate the
equipment
As an ENERGY STARreg Partner our company has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STARreg
guidelines for energy efficiency
WARNING
To prevent fire or chock hazard do not expose the monitor to rain or moisture Dangerously high voltages are
present inside the monitor Do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only
- 4 -
PRECAUTIONS Do not use the monitor near water eg near a bathtub washbowl kitchen sink laundry tub
Swimming pool or in a wet basement
Do not place the monitor on an unstable trolley stand or table If the monitor falls it can injure a person and
cause serious damage to the appliance Use only a trolley or stand recommended by the manufacture or sold
with the monitor If you mount the monitor on a wall or shelf use a mounting kit approved by the manufacture and
follow the kit instructions
Slots and openings in the back and bottom of the cabinet area provided for ventilation To ensure reliable
operation of the monitor and to protect it from overheating be sure these openings are not blocked or covered
Do not place the monitor on a bed sofa rug or similar surface Do not place the monitor near or over a radiator
or heat register Do not place the monitor in a bookcase or cabinet unless proper ventilation is provided
The monitor should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the label If you are not sure of
the type of power supplied to your home consult your dealer or local power company
The monitor is equipped with a three-pronged grounded plug a plug with a third (grounding) pin This plug will fit
only into a grounded power outlet as a safety feature If your outlet does not accommodate the three-wire plug
have an electrician install the correct outlet or use an adapter to ground the appliance safely Do not defeat the
safety purpose of the grounded plug
Unplug the unit during a lightning storm or when it will not be used for long periods of time This will protect the
monitor from damage due to power surges
Do not overload power strips and extension cords Overloading can result in fire or electric shock
Never push any object into the slot on the monitor cabinet It could short circuit parts causing a fire or electric
shock Never spill liquids on the monitor
Do not attempt to service the monitor yourself opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous
voltages and other hazards Please refer all servicing to qualified service personnel
To ensure satisfactory operation use the monitor only with UL listed computers which have appropriate
configured receptacles marked between 100-240V AC Min 35A
The wall socket shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible
- 5 -
SPECIAL NOTES ON LCD MONITORS
The following symptoms are normal with LCD monitor and do not indicate a problem
NOTES Due to the nature of the fluorescent light the screen may flicker during initial use Turn off the Power Switch and
then turn it on again to make sure the flicker disappears
You may find slightly uneven brightness in the screen depending on the desktop pattern you use
The LCD screen has effective pixels of 9999 or more It may include blemishes of 001 or less such as a
missing pixel or a pixel lit all of the time
Due to the nature of the LCD screen an afterimage of the previous screen may remain after switching the image
when the same image is displayed for hours In this case the screen is recovered slowly by changing the image or
turning off the Power Switch for hours
- 6 -
Table of contents Chapter 1 Monitor Feature helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip8 INTRODUCTION8 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMEENTS9 MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM 21 BLOCK DIAGRAM 24 MONITOR BOARD LAYOUT 25 SOFTWARE FLOW CHART 27 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 28 SYSTEM INSTALLATION 29 POWERINVERTOR BOARD 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION 35 SAFETY 37
Chapter 2 Operating Instruction helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip39 CONTROLS 39 MAIN OSD MENU 40 OSD MESSAGE 42 PLUG AND PLAY 44 WHITE COLOR TEMPERATURE 45 AUDIO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 45
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip47 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 47
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip50 TROUBLESHOOTING 54
Chapter 5 Connector Information helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip55 CONNECTOR INFORMATION 58
Chapter 6 FRU List helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 59 PART LIST 55
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip60 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 60
- 7 -
Chapter 1 Monitor Feature INTRODUCTION Scope This specification defines the requirements for the 19rdquo MICRO-PROCESSOR based Multi-mode supported high resolution color LCD monitor This monitor can be directly connected to general 15 pin D-sub VGA connector and eliminates the requirement of optional special display card It also supports VESA DPMS power management and plug amp play function There is a build-in stereo audio amplifier with volume control to drive a pair of speakers
Description The LCD monitor is designed with the latest LCD technology to provide a performance oriented product with no radiation This will alleviate the growing health concerns It is also a space saving design allowing more desktop space and comparing to the traditional CRT monitor it consumes less power and gets less weight in addition MTBF target is 20k hours or more
Comparison Chart of AL1916 AW698 AW998
Panel Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Signal Interface DSUB D-SUB amp DVI-D Sync Type for analog input Separate compatible Separate compatible
Color Temp user adjust Support Support DDC DDC2B DDC2B Speaker NO NO
Headphone Jack NO NO
Microphone Jack No No
USB Hub Not support Not support
Tilt Swivel Yes No No No
Height Adjust Option Option
- 8 -
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Standard Test Conditions All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified Ambient light 225 lux Viewing distance 50 cm in front of LCD panel Warrn up time All specifications 30 minutes Fully functional 5 seconds Measuring Equipment Chroma 2250 signal generator or equivalent directly Connected to the monitor under test Minolta CA100 photometer or equivalent Control settings User brightness control Maximum (unless otherwise specified ) User contrast control Typical (unless otherwise specified ) User redwhite balance Greenwhite balance and Bluewhite balance control In the center (unless otherwise specified ) Power input 110Vac or 230Vac Ambient temperature 20 plusmn 5 ˚C ( 68 plusmn 9 ˚ F) Analog input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
The units of measure stated in this document are listed below
Digital input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz (option)
1 gamma = 1 nano tesla 1 tesla = 10000 gauss
cm = in x 254 lb = kg x 22
degrees F = [degC x 18] + 32 degrees C = [degF - 32]18
u = 4x(-2x + 12y + 3) v = 9y(-2x + 12y + 3)
x = (27u4)[(9u2) - 12v + 9] y = (3v)[(9u2) - 12v + 9]
nits = cd(m2) = Ft-L x 3426 lux = foot-candle x 1076
- 9 -
LCD monitor General specification Panel Type 19 ldquo active matrix color TFT LCD
Display size 40824 mm (H) x25515 mm (V) PC interface 1) Video RGB analog 07V peak to peak
Sync TTL positive or negative Signal connector 15 pin Mini D type (standard VGA video)
24pin DVI-D type (DVI) (option) Front control power onoff with LED select adjustment (+-) Interface frequency Horizontal Frequency 30KHz ----80KHz Vertical Frequency 49Hz ------75Hz Plug amp play Support VESA DDC2B functions Power Input voltage Single phase 5060HZ 100VAC to 240VAC plusmn10 Total output power 55 Watt max
- 10 -
LCD Panel Specification
Note 1) Definition of Viewing Angle Viewing angle range (10leCR)
- 11 -
Note 2) Definition of Contrast Ratio (CR) Ratio of gray max(Gmax)gray min(Gmin) at the
center point of panel Luminance with all pixels white (Gmax)
CR= Luminance with all pixels black (Gmin)
Note 3) Definition of Response time Sum of TR TF
Note 4) After stabilizing and leaving the panel alone at a given temperature for 30 min the measurement should be executed Measurement should be executed n a stable windless and dark room30 min after lighting the back-light This should be measured in the center of screen Dual lamp current 130mA(65mA x2)(Refer to the note(1) in the page 14 for more information )
Environment condition Ta=25plusmn2degC
- 12 -
Optical characteristics measurement setup Notes 5) Definition of Luminance of White measure the luminance of white at center point
Notes 6)Definition of 9 points brightness uniformity (Measuring points Refer to the Note 5) AU Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Samsumg Bmax-Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Bmax Maximum brightness Bmin Minimum brightness Notes 7) Definition of Flicker level Flicker Voltage pp F = x 100 LMD Voltage dc diams One maximum value of three estimated values diams For this test an LMD(Light Measurement Device)is needed with adequate response time
to track any visible rate flicker component and with a voltage level output proportional To luminance intensity
- 13 -
diams Test Pattern For dot inversion Driving(Gray levels of foreground dots on the test panel Are G22G32and G45)
diams Test Point Center point of the display area N
Ta W
diams
diams
ote 8) Definition of Crosstalk (Refer to the VESA STD)
he calculation for shadowing is made from the 2 luminance measurements Gbkg and Lsh s follows Lmax -Lmin CT = x100 Lmin
here Lmax is the larger value of Gbkg or Lsh and Lmin is the smaller of the two To determine background and foreground levels (colors)first set the background to any gray scale or color level suitable for shadowing determination(Note that it may take several iterations of adjusting background level and box levels to determine the proper value for the background Next display the box levels to determine the proper value for the background level Look for shadowing in any direction from box E Independently vary the gray level (or color) of the background and box E until the worst case shadowing is observed This defines the background (Gbkg) and foreground (Gfg) levels to be maintained for the remainder of the test
One point only (the target) will be measured To determine that point proceed as follows Using the background and foreground gray levels of step1 (Gbkg and Gfg) Turn on each box at a time Look for the case with the worst shadowing The box causing the worst case is the shadowing source or Bsrc Use Bsrc and the box opposite from it that lies directly in
- 14 -
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
PRECAUTIONS Do not use the monitor near water eg near a bathtub washbowl kitchen sink laundry tub
Swimming pool or in a wet basement
Do not place the monitor on an unstable trolley stand or table If the monitor falls it can injure a person and
cause serious damage to the appliance Use only a trolley or stand recommended by the manufacture or sold
with the monitor If you mount the monitor on a wall or shelf use a mounting kit approved by the manufacture and
follow the kit instructions
Slots and openings in the back and bottom of the cabinet area provided for ventilation To ensure reliable
operation of the monitor and to protect it from overheating be sure these openings are not blocked or covered
Do not place the monitor on a bed sofa rug or similar surface Do not place the monitor near or over a radiator
or heat register Do not place the monitor in a bookcase or cabinet unless proper ventilation is provided
The monitor should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the label If you are not sure of
the type of power supplied to your home consult your dealer or local power company
The monitor is equipped with a three-pronged grounded plug a plug with a third (grounding) pin This plug will fit
only into a grounded power outlet as a safety feature If your outlet does not accommodate the three-wire plug
have an electrician install the correct outlet or use an adapter to ground the appliance safely Do not defeat the
safety purpose of the grounded plug
Unplug the unit during a lightning storm or when it will not be used for long periods of time This will protect the
monitor from damage due to power surges
Do not overload power strips and extension cords Overloading can result in fire or electric shock
Never push any object into the slot on the monitor cabinet It could short circuit parts causing a fire or electric
shock Never spill liquids on the monitor
Do not attempt to service the monitor yourself opening or removing covers can expose you to dangerous
voltages and other hazards Please refer all servicing to qualified service personnel
To ensure satisfactory operation use the monitor only with UL listed computers which have appropriate
configured receptacles marked between 100-240V AC Min 35A
The wall socket shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible
- 5 -
SPECIAL NOTES ON LCD MONITORS
The following symptoms are normal with LCD monitor and do not indicate a problem
NOTES Due to the nature of the fluorescent light the screen may flicker during initial use Turn off the Power Switch and
then turn it on again to make sure the flicker disappears
You may find slightly uneven brightness in the screen depending on the desktop pattern you use
The LCD screen has effective pixels of 9999 or more It may include blemishes of 001 or less such as a
missing pixel or a pixel lit all of the time
Due to the nature of the LCD screen an afterimage of the previous screen may remain after switching the image
when the same image is displayed for hours In this case the screen is recovered slowly by changing the image or
turning off the Power Switch for hours
- 6 -
Table of contents Chapter 1 Monitor Feature helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip8 INTRODUCTION8 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMEENTS9 MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM 21 BLOCK DIAGRAM 24 MONITOR BOARD LAYOUT 25 SOFTWARE FLOW CHART 27 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 28 SYSTEM INSTALLATION 29 POWERINVERTOR BOARD 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION 35 SAFETY 37
Chapter 2 Operating Instruction helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip39 CONTROLS 39 MAIN OSD MENU 40 OSD MESSAGE 42 PLUG AND PLAY 44 WHITE COLOR TEMPERATURE 45 AUDIO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 45
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip47 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 47
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip50 TROUBLESHOOTING 54
Chapter 5 Connector Information helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip55 CONNECTOR INFORMATION 58
Chapter 6 FRU List helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 59 PART LIST 55
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip60 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 60
- 7 -
Chapter 1 Monitor Feature INTRODUCTION Scope This specification defines the requirements for the 19rdquo MICRO-PROCESSOR based Multi-mode supported high resolution color LCD monitor This monitor can be directly connected to general 15 pin D-sub VGA connector and eliminates the requirement of optional special display card It also supports VESA DPMS power management and plug amp play function There is a build-in stereo audio amplifier with volume control to drive a pair of speakers
Description The LCD monitor is designed with the latest LCD technology to provide a performance oriented product with no radiation This will alleviate the growing health concerns It is also a space saving design allowing more desktop space and comparing to the traditional CRT monitor it consumes less power and gets less weight in addition MTBF target is 20k hours or more
Comparison Chart of AL1916 AW698 AW998
Panel Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Signal Interface DSUB D-SUB amp DVI-D Sync Type for analog input Separate compatible Separate compatible
Color Temp user adjust Support Support DDC DDC2B DDC2B Speaker NO NO
Headphone Jack NO NO
Microphone Jack No No
USB Hub Not support Not support
Tilt Swivel Yes No No No
Height Adjust Option Option
- 8 -
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Standard Test Conditions All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified Ambient light 225 lux Viewing distance 50 cm in front of LCD panel Warrn up time All specifications 30 minutes Fully functional 5 seconds Measuring Equipment Chroma 2250 signal generator or equivalent directly Connected to the monitor under test Minolta CA100 photometer or equivalent Control settings User brightness control Maximum (unless otherwise specified ) User contrast control Typical (unless otherwise specified ) User redwhite balance Greenwhite balance and Bluewhite balance control In the center (unless otherwise specified ) Power input 110Vac or 230Vac Ambient temperature 20 plusmn 5 ˚C ( 68 plusmn 9 ˚ F) Analog input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
The units of measure stated in this document are listed below
Digital input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz (option)
1 gamma = 1 nano tesla 1 tesla = 10000 gauss
cm = in x 254 lb = kg x 22
degrees F = [degC x 18] + 32 degrees C = [degF - 32]18
u = 4x(-2x + 12y + 3) v = 9y(-2x + 12y + 3)
x = (27u4)[(9u2) - 12v + 9] y = (3v)[(9u2) - 12v + 9]
nits = cd(m2) = Ft-L x 3426 lux = foot-candle x 1076
- 9 -
LCD monitor General specification Panel Type 19 ldquo active matrix color TFT LCD
Display size 40824 mm (H) x25515 mm (V) PC interface 1) Video RGB analog 07V peak to peak
Sync TTL positive or negative Signal connector 15 pin Mini D type (standard VGA video)
24pin DVI-D type (DVI) (option) Front control power onoff with LED select adjustment (+-) Interface frequency Horizontal Frequency 30KHz ----80KHz Vertical Frequency 49Hz ------75Hz Plug amp play Support VESA DDC2B functions Power Input voltage Single phase 5060HZ 100VAC to 240VAC plusmn10 Total output power 55 Watt max
- 10 -
LCD Panel Specification
Note 1) Definition of Viewing Angle Viewing angle range (10leCR)
- 11 -
Note 2) Definition of Contrast Ratio (CR) Ratio of gray max(Gmax)gray min(Gmin) at the
center point of panel Luminance with all pixels white (Gmax)
CR= Luminance with all pixels black (Gmin)
Note 3) Definition of Response time Sum of TR TF
Note 4) After stabilizing and leaving the panel alone at a given temperature for 30 min the measurement should be executed Measurement should be executed n a stable windless and dark room30 min after lighting the back-light This should be measured in the center of screen Dual lamp current 130mA(65mA x2)(Refer to the note(1) in the page 14 for more information )
Environment condition Ta=25plusmn2degC
- 12 -
Optical characteristics measurement setup Notes 5) Definition of Luminance of White measure the luminance of white at center point
Notes 6)Definition of 9 points brightness uniformity (Measuring points Refer to the Note 5) AU Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Samsumg Bmax-Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Bmax Maximum brightness Bmin Minimum brightness Notes 7) Definition of Flicker level Flicker Voltage pp F = x 100 LMD Voltage dc diams One maximum value of three estimated values diams For this test an LMD(Light Measurement Device)is needed with adequate response time
to track any visible rate flicker component and with a voltage level output proportional To luminance intensity
- 13 -
diams Test Pattern For dot inversion Driving(Gray levels of foreground dots on the test panel Are G22G32and G45)
diams Test Point Center point of the display area N
Ta W
diams
diams
ote 8) Definition of Crosstalk (Refer to the VESA STD)
he calculation for shadowing is made from the 2 luminance measurements Gbkg and Lsh s follows Lmax -Lmin CT = x100 Lmin
here Lmax is the larger value of Gbkg or Lsh and Lmin is the smaller of the two To determine background and foreground levels (colors)first set the background to any gray scale or color level suitable for shadowing determination(Note that it may take several iterations of adjusting background level and box levels to determine the proper value for the background Next display the box levels to determine the proper value for the background level Look for shadowing in any direction from box E Independently vary the gray level (or color) of the background and box E until the worst case shadowing is observed This defines the background (Gbkg) and foreground (Gfg) levels to be maintained for the remainder of the test
One point only (the target) will be measured To determine that point proceed as follows Using the background and foreground gray levels of step1 (Gbkg and Gfg) Turn on each box at a time Look for the case with the worst shadowing The box causing the worst case is the shadowing source or Bsrc Use Bsrc and the box opposite from it that lies directly in
- 14 -
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
SPECIAL NOTES ON LCD MONITORS
The following symptoms are normal with LCD monitor and do not indicate a problem
NOTES Due to the nature of the fluorescent light the screen may flicker during initial use Turn off the Power Switch and
then turn it on again to make sure the flicker disappears
You may find slightly uneven brightness in the screen depending on the desktop pattern you use
The LCD screen has effective pixels of 9999 or more It may include blemishes of 001 or less such as a
missing pixel or a pixel lit all of the time
Due to the nature of the LCD screen an afterimage of the previous screen may remain after switching the image
when the same image is displayed for hours In this case the screen is recovered slowly by changing the image or
turning off the Power Switch for hours
- 6 -
Table of contents Chapter 1 Monitor Feature helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip8 INTRODUCTION8 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMEENTS9 MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM 21 BLOCK DIAGRAM 24 MONITOR BOARD LAYOUT 25 SOFTWARE FLOW CHART 27 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 28 SYSTEM INSTALLATION 29 POWERINVERTOR BOARD 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION 35 SAFETY 37
Chapter 2 Operating Instruction helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip39 CONTROLS 39 MAIN OSD MENU 40 OSD MESSAGE 42 PLUG AND PLAY 44 WHITE COLOR TEMPERATURE 45 AUDIO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 45
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip47 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 47
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip50 TROUBLESHOOTING 54
Chapter 5 Connector Information helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip55 CONNECTOR INFORMATION 58
Chapter 6 FRU List helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 59 PART LIST 55
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip60 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 60
- 7 -
Chapter 1 Monitor Feature INTRODUCTION Scope This specification defines the requirements for the 19rdquo MICRO-PROCESSOR based Multi-mode supported high resolution color LCD monitor This monitor can be directly connected to general 15 pin D-sub VGA connector and eliminates the requirement of optional special display card It also supports VESA DPMS power management and plug amp play function There is a build-in stereo audio amplifier with volume control to drive a pair of speakers
Description The LCD monitor is designed with the latest LCD technology to provide a performance oriented product with no radiation This will alleviate the growing health concerns It is also a space saving design allowing more desktop space and comparing to the traditional CRT monitor it consumes less power and gets less weight in addition MTBF target is 20k hours or more
Comparison Chart of AL1916 AW698 AW998
Panel Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Signal Interface DSUB D-SUB amp DVI-D Sync Type for analog input Separate compatible Separate compatible
Color Temp user adjust Support Support DDC DDC2B DDC2B Speaker NO NO
Headphone Jack NO NO
Microphone Jack No No
USB Hub Not support Not support
Tilt Swivel Yes No No No
Height Adjust Option Option
- 8 -
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Standard Test Conditions All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified Ambient light 225 lux Viewing distance 50 cm in front of LCD panel Warrn up time All specifications 30 minutes Fully functional 5 seconds Measuring Equipment Chroma 2250 signal generator or equivalent directly Connected to the monitor under test Minolta CA100 photometer or equivalent Control settings User brightness control Maximum (unless otherwise specified ) User contrast control Typical (unless otherwise specified ) User redwhite balance Greenwhite balance and Bluewhite balance control In the center (unless otherwise specified ) Power input 110Vac or 230Vac Ambient temperature 20 plusmn 5 ˚C ( 68 plusmn 9 ˚ F) Analog input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
The units of measure stated in this document are listed below
Digital input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz (option)
1 gamma = 1 nano tesla 1 tesla = 10000 gauss
cm = in x 254 lb = kg x 22
degrees F = [degC x 18] + 32 degrees C = [degF - 32]18
u = 4x(-2x + 12y + 3) v = 9y(-2x + 12y + 3)
x = (27u4)[(9u2) - 12v + 9] y = (3v)[(9u2) - 12v + 9]
nits = cd(m2) = Ft-L x 3426 lux = foot-candle x 1076
- 9 -
LCD monitor General specification Panel Type 19 ldquo active matrix color TFT LCD
Display size 40824 mm (H) x25515 mm (V) PC interface 1) Video RGB analog 07V peak to peak
Sync TTL positive or negative Signal connector 15 pin Mini D type (standard VGA video)
24pin DVI-D type (DVI) (option) Front control power onoff with LED select adjustment (+-) Interface frequency Horizontal Frequency 30KHz ----80KHz Vertical Frequency 49Hz ------75Hz Plug amp play Support VESA DDC2B functions Power Input voltage Single phase 5060HZ 100VAC to 240VAC plusmn10 Total output power 55 Watt max
- 10 -
LCD Panel Specification
Note 1) Definition of Viewing Angle Viewing angle range (10leCR)
- 11 -
Note 2) Definition of Contrast Ratio (CR) Ratio of gray max(Gmax)gray min(Gmin) at the
center point of panel Luminance with all pixels white (Gmax)
CR= Luminance with all pixels black (Gmin)
Note 3) Definition of Response time Sum of TR TF
Note 4) After stabilizing and leaving the panel alone at a given temperature for 30 min the measurement should be executed Measurement should be executed n a stable windless and dark room30 min after lighting the back-light This should be measured in the center of screen Dual lamp current 130mA(65mA x2)(Refer to the note(1) in the page 14 for more information )
Environment condition Ta=25plusmn2degC
- 12 -
Optical characteristics measurement setup Notes 5) Definition of Luminance of White measure the luminance of white at center point
Notes 6)Definition of 9 points brightness uniformity (Measuring points Refer to the Note 5) AU Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Samsumg Bmax-Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Bmax Maximum brightness Bmin Minimum brightness Notes 7) Definition of Flicker level Flicker Voltage pp F = x 100 LMD Voltage dc diams One maximum value of three estimated values diams For this test an LMD(Light Measurement Device)is needed with adequate response time
to track any visible rate flicker component and with a voltage level output proportional To luminance intensity
- 13 -
diams Test Pattern For dot inversion Driving(Gray levels of foreground dots on the test panel Are G22G32and G45)
diams Test Point Center point of the display area N
Ta W
diams
diams
ote 8) Definition of Crosstalk (Refer to the VESA STD)
he calculation for shadowing is made from the 2 luminance measurements Gbkg and Lsh s follows Lmax -Lmin CT = x100 Lmin
here Lmax is the larger value of Gbkg or Lsh and Lmin is the smaller of the two To determine background and foreground levels (colors)first set the background to any gray scale or color level suitable for shadowing determination(Note that it may take several iterations of adjusting background level and box levels to determine the proper value for the background Next display the box levels to determine the proper value for the background level Look for shadowing in any direction from box E Independently vary the gray level (or color) of the background and box E until the worst case shadowing is observed This defines the background (Gbkg) and foreground (Gfg) levels to be maintained for the remainder of the test
One point only (the target) will be measured To determine that point proceed as follows Using the background and foreground gray levels of step1 (Gbkg and Gfg) Turn on each box at a time Look for the case with the worst shadowing The box causing the worst case is the shadowing source or Bsrc Use Bsrc and the box opposite from it that lies directly in
- 14 -
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Table of contents Chapter 1 Monitor Feature helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip8 INTRODUCTION8 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMEENTS9 MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM 21 BLOCK DIAGRAM 24 MONITOR BOARD LAYOUT 25 SOFTWARE FLOW CHART 27 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS 28 SYSTEM INSTALLATION 29 POWERINVERTOR BOARD 34 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION 35 SAFETY 37
Chapter 2 Operating Instruction helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip39 CONTROLS 39 MAIN OSD MENU 40 OSD MESSAGE 42 PLUG AND PLAY 44 WHITE COLOR TEMPERATURE 45 AUDIO TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 45
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip47 DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE 47
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip50 TROUBLESHOOTING 54
Chapter 5 Connector Information helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip55 CONNECTOR INFORMATION 58
Chapter 6 FRU List helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip 59 PART LIST 55
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram helliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphelliphellip60 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 60
- 7 -
Chapter 1 Monitor Feature INTRODUCTION Scope This specification defines the requirements for the 19rdquo MICRO-PROCESSOR based Multi-mode supported high resolution color LCD monitor This monitor can be directly connected to general 15 pin D-sub VGA connector and eliminates the requirement of optional special display card It also supports VESA DPMS power management and plug amp play function There is a build-in stereo audio amplifier with volume control to drive a pair of speakers
Description The LCD monitor is designed with the latest LCD technology to provide a performance oriented product with no radiation This will alleviate the growing health concerns It is also a space saving design allowing more desktop space and comparing to the traditional CRT monitor it consumes less power and gets less weight in addition MTBF target is 20k hours or more
Comparison Chart of AL1916 AW698 AW998
Panel Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Signal Interface DSUB D-SUB amp DVI-D Sync Type for analog input Separate compatible Separate compatible
Color Temp user adjust Support Support DDC DDC2B DDC2B Speaker NO NO
Headphone Jack NO NO
Microphone Jack No No
USB Hub Not support Not support
Tilt Swivel Yes No No No
Height Adjust Option Option
- 8 -
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Standard Test Conditions All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified Ambient light 225 lux Viewing distance 50 cm in front of LCD panel Warrn up time All specifications 30 minutes Fully functional 5 seconds Measuring Equipment Chroma 2250 signal generator or equivalent directly Connected to the monitor under test Minolta CA100 photometer or equivalent Control settings User brightness control Maximum (unless otherwise specified ) User contrast control Typical (unless otherwise specified ) User redwhite balance Greenwhite balance and Bluewhite balance control In the center (unless otherwise specified ) Power input 110Vac or 230Vac Ambient temperature 20 plusmn 5 ˚C ( 68 plusmn 9 ˚ F) Analog input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
The units of measure stated in this document are listed below
Digital input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz (option)
1 gamma = 1 nano tesla 1 tesla = 10000 gauss
cm = in x 254 lb = kg x 22
degrees F = [degC x 18] + 32 degrees C = [degF - 32]18
u = 4x(-2x + 12y + 3) v = 9y(-2x + 12y + 3)
x = (27u4)[(9u2) - 12v + 9] y = (3v)[(9u2) - 12v + 9]
nits = cd(m2) = Ft-L x 3426 lux = foot-candle x 1076
- 9 -
LCD monitor General specification Panel Type 19 ldquo active matrix color TFT LCD
Display size 40824 mm (H) x25515 mm (V) PC interface 1) Video RGB analog 07V peak to peak
Sync TTL positive or negative Signal connector 15 pin Mini D type (standard VGA video)
24pin DVI-D type (DVI) (option) Front control power onoff with LED select adjustment (+-) Interface frequency Horizontal Frequency 30KHz ----80KHz Vertical Frequency 49Hz ------75Hz Plug amp play Support VESA DDC2B functions Power Input voltage Single phase 5060HZ 100VAC to 240VAC plusmn10 Total output power 55 Watt max
- 10 -
LCD Panel Specification
Note 1) Definition of Viewing Angle Viewing angle range (10leCR)
- 11 -
Note 2) Definition of Contrast Ratio (CR) Ratio of gray max(Gmax)gray min(Gmin) at the
center point of panel Luminance with all pixels white (Gmax)
CR= Luminance with all pixels black (Gmin)
Note 3) Definition of Response time Sum of TR TF
Note 4) After stabilizing and leaving the panel alone at a given temperature for 30 min the measurement should be executed Measurement should be executed n a stable windless and dark room30 min after lighting the back-light This should be measured in the center of screen Dual lamp current 130mA(65mA x2)(Refer to the note(1) in the page 14 for more information )
Environment condition Ta=25plusmn2degC
- 12 -
Optical characteristics measurement setup Notes 5) Definition of Luminance of White measure the luminance of white at center point
Notes 6)Definition of 9 points brightness uniformity (Measuring points Refer to the Note 5) AU Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Samsumg Bmax-Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Bmax Maximum brightness Bmin Minimum brightness Notes 7) Definition of Flicker level Flicker Voltage pp F = x 100 LMD Voltage dc diams One maximum value of three estimated values diams For this test an LMD(Light Measurement Device)is needed with adequate response time
to track any visible rate flicker component and with a voltage level output proportional To luminance intensity
- 13 -
diams Test Pattern For dot inversion Driving(Gray levels of foreground dots on the test panel Are G22G32and G45)
diams Test Point Center point of the display area N
Ta W
diams
diams
ote 8) Definition of Crosstalk (Refer to the VESA STD)
he calculation for shadowing is made from the 2 luminance measurements Gbkg and Lsh s follows Lmax -Lmin CT = x100 Lmin
here Lmax is the larger value of Gbkg or Lsh and Lmin is the smaller of the two To determine background and foreground levels (colors)first set the background to any gray scale or color level suitable for shadowing determination(Note that it may take several iterations of adjusting background level and box levels to determine the proper value for the background Next display the box levels to determine the proper value for the background level Look for shadowing in any direction from box E Independently vary the gray level (or color) of the background and box E until the worst case shadowing is observed This defines the background (Gbkg) and foreground (Gfg) levels to be maintained for the remainder of the test
One point only (the target) will be measured To determine that point proceed as follows Using the background and foreground gray levels of step1 (Gbkg and Gfg) Turn on each box at a time Look for the case with the worst shadowing The box causing the worst case is the shadowing source or Bsrc Use Bsrc and the box opposite from it that lies directly in
- 14 -
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Chapter 1 Monitor Feature INTRODUCTION Scope This specification defines the requirements for the 19rdquo MICRO-PROCESSOR based Multi-mode supported high resolution color LCD monitor This monitor can be directly connected to general 15 pin D-sub VGA connector and eliminates the requirement of optional special display card It also supports VESA DPMS power management and plug amp play function There is a build-in stereo audio amplifier with volume control to drive a pair of speakers
Description The LCD monitor is designed with the latest LCD technology to provide a performance oriented product with no radiation This will alleviate the growing health concerns It is also a space saving design allowing more desktop space and comparing to the traditional CRT monitor it consumes less power and gets less weight in addition MTBF target is 20k hours or more
Comparison Chart of AL1916 AW698 AW998
Panel Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Normal 19rdquo panel HSD190MGW1
Signal Interface DSUB D-SUB amp DVI-D Sync Type for analog input Separate compatible Separate compatible
Color Temp user adjust Support Support DDC DDC2B DDC2B Speaker NO NO
Headphone Jack NO NO
Microphone Jack No No
USB Hub Not support Not support
Tilt Swivel Yes No No No
Height Adjust Option Option
- 8 -
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Standard Test Conditions All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified Ambient light 225 lux Viewing distance 50 cm in front of LCD panel Warrn up time All specifications 30 minutes Fully functional 5 seconds Measuring Equipment Chroma 2250 signal generator or equivalent directly Connected to the monitor under test Minolta CA100 photometer or equivalent Control settings User brightness control Maximum (unless otherwise specified ) User contrast control Typical (unless otherwise specified ) User redwhite balance Greenwhite balance and Bluewhite balance control In the center (unless otherwise specified ) Power input 110Vac or 230Vac Ambient temperature 20 plusmn 5 ˚C ( 68 plusmn 9 ˚ F) Analog input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
The units of measure stated in this document are listed below
Digital input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz (option)
1 gamma = 1 nano tesla 1 tesla = 10000 gauss
cm = in x 254 lb = kg x 22
degrees F = [degC x 18] + 32 degrees C = [degF - 32]18
u = 4x(-2x + 12y + 3) v = 9y(-2x + 12y + 3)
x = (27u4)[(9u2) - 12v + 9] y = (3v)[(9u2) - 12v + 9]
nits = cd(m2) = Ft-L x 3426 lux = foot-candle x 1076
- 9 -
LCD monitor General specification Panel Type 19 ldquo active matrix color TFT LCD
Display size 40824 mm (H) x25515 mm (V) PC interface 1) Video RGB analog 07V peak to peak
Sync TTL positive or negative Signal connector 15 pin Mini D type (standard VGA video)
24pin DVI-D type (DVI) (option) Front control power onoff with LED select adjustment (+-) Interface frequency Horizontal Frequency 30KHz ----80KHz Vertical Frequency 49Hz ------75Hz Plug amp play Support VESA DDC2B functions Power Input voltage Single phase 5060HZ 100VAC to 240VAC plusmn10 Total output power 55 Watt max
- 10 -
LCD Panel Specification
Note 1) Definition of Viewing Angle Viewing angle range (10leCR)
- 11 -
Note 2) Definition of Contrast Ratio (CR) Ratio of gray max(Gmax)gray min(Gmin) at the
center point of panel Luminance with all pixels white (Gmax)
CR= Luminance with all pixels black (Gmin)
Note 3) Definition of Response time Sum of TR TF
Note 4) After stabilizing and leaving the panel alone at a given temperature for 30 min the measurement should be executed Measurement should be executed n a stable windless and dark room30 min after lighting the back-light This should be measured in the center of screen Dual lamp current 130mA(65mA x2)(Refer to the note(1) in the page 14 for more information )
Environment condition Ta=25plusmn2degC
- 12 -
Optical characteristics measurement setup Notes 5) Definition of Luminance of White measure the luminance of white at center point
Notes 6)Definition of 9 points brightness uniformity (Measuring points Refer to the Note 5) AU Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Samsumg Bmax-Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Bmax Maximum brightness Bmin Minimum brightness Notes 7) Definition of Flicker level Flicker Voltage pp F = x 100 LMD Voltage dc diams One maximum value of three estimated values diams For this test an LMD(Light Measurement Device)is needed with adequate response time
to track any visible rate flicker component and with a voltage level output proportional To luminance intensity
- 13 -
diams Test Pattern For dot inversion Driving(Gray levels of foreground dots on the test panel Are G22G32and G45)
diams Test Point Center point of the display area N
Ta W
diams
diams
ote 8) Definition of Crosstalk (Refer to the VESA STD)
he calculation for shadowing is made from the 2 luminance measurements Gbkg and Lsh s follows Lmax -Lmin CT = x100 Lmin
here Lmax is the larger value of Gbkg or Lsh and Lmin is the smaller of the two To determine background and foreground levels (colors)first set the background to any gray scale or color level suitable for shadowing determination(Note that it may take several iterations of adjusting background level and box levels to determine the proper value for the background Next display the box levels to determine the proper value for the background level Look for shadowing in any direction from box E Independently vary the gray level (or color) of the background and box E until the worst case shadowing is observed This defines the background (Gbkg) and foreground (Gfg) levels to be maintained for the remainder of the test
One point only (the target) will be measured To determine that point proceed as follows Using the background and foreground gray levels of step1 (Gbkg and Gfg) Turn on each box at a time Look for the case with the worst shadowing The box causing the worst case is the shadowing source or Bsrc Use Bsrc and the box opposite from it that lies directly in
- 14 -
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Standard Test Conditions All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified All tests shall be performed under the following conditions unless otherwise specified Ambient light 225 lux Viewing distance 50 cm in front of LCD panel Warrn up time All specifications 30 minutes Fully functional 5 seconds Measuring Equipment Chroma 2250 signal generator or equivalent directly Connected to the monitor under test Minolta CA100 photometer or equivalent Control settings User brightness control Maximum (unless otherwise specified ) User contrast control Typical (unless otherwise specified ) User redwhite balance Greenwhite balance and Bluewhite balance control In the center (unless otherwise specified ) Power input 110Vac or 230Vac Ambient temperature 20 plusmn 5 ˚C ( 68 plusmn 9 ˚ F) Analog input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
The units of measure stated in this document are listed below
Digital input mode 1440 x900 60 Hz (option)
1 gamma = 1 nano tesla 1 tesla = 10000 gauss
cm = in x 254 lb = kg x 22
degrees F = [degC x 18] + 32 degrees C = [degF - 32]18
u = 4x(-2x + 12y + 3) v = 9y(-2x + 12y + 3)
x = (27u4)[(9u2) - 12v + 9] y = (3v)[(9u2) - 12v + 9]
nits = cd(m2) = Ft-L x 3426 lux = foot-candle x 1076
- 9 -
LCD monitor General specification Panel Type 19 ldquo active matrix color TFT LCD
Display size 40824 mm (H) x25515 mm (V) PC interface 1) Video RGB analog 07V peak to peak
Sync TTL positive or negative Signal connector 15 pin Mini D type (standard VGA video)
24pin DVI-D type (DVI) (option) Front control power onoff with LED select adjustment (+-) Interface frequency Horizontal Frequency 30KHz ----80KHz Vertical Frequency 49Hz ------75Hz Plug amp play Support VESA DDC2B functions Power Input voltage Single phase 5060HZ 100VAC to 240VAC plusmn10 Total output power 55 Watt max
- 10 -
LCD Panel Specification
Note 1) Definition of Viewing Angle Viewing angle range (10leCR)
- 11 -
Note 2) Definition of Contrast Ratio (CR) Ratio of gray max(Gmax)gray min(Gmin) at the
center point of panel Luminance with all pixels white (Gmax)
CR= Luminance with all pixels black (Gmin)
Note 3) Definition of Response time Sum of TR TF
Note 4) After stabilizing and leaving the panel alone at a given temperature for 30 min the measurement should be executed Measurement should be executed n a stable windless and dark room30 min after lighting the back-light This should be measured in the center of screen Dual lamp current 130mA(65mA x2)(Refer to the note(1) in the page 14 for more information )
Environment condition Ta=25plusmn2degC
- 12 -
Optical characteristics measurement setup Notes 5) Definition of Luminance of White measure the luminance of white at center point
Notes 6)Definition of 9 points brightness uniformity (Measuring points Refer to the Note 5) AU Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Samsumg Bmax-Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Bmax Maximum brightness Bmin Minimum brightness Notes 7) Definition of Flicker level Flicker Voltage pp F = x 100 LMD Voltage dc diams One maximum value of three estimated values diams For this test an LMD(Light Measurement Device)is needed with adequate response time
to track any visible rate flicker component and with a voltage level output proportional To luminance intensity
- 13 -
diams Test Pattern For dot inversion Driving(Gray levels of foreground dots on the test panel Are G22G32and G45)
diams Test Point Center point of the display area N
Ta W
diams
diams
ote 8) Definition of Crosstalk (Refer to the VESA STD)
he calculation for shadowing is made from the 2 luminance measurements Gbkg and Lsh s follows Lmax -Lmin CT = x100 Lmin
here Lmax is the larger value of Gbkg or Lsh and Lmin is the smaller of the two To determine background and foreground levels (colors)first set the background to any gray scale or color level suitable for shadowing determination(Note that it may take several iterations of adjusting background level and box levels to determine the proper value for the background Next display the box levels to determine the proper value for the background level Look for shadowing in any direction from box E Independently vary the gray level (or color) of the background and box E until the worst case shadowing is observed This defines the background (Gbkg) and foreground (Gfg) levels to be maintained for the remainder of the test
One point only (the target) will be measured To determine that point proceed as follows Using the background and foreground gray levels of step1 (Gbkg and Gfg) Turn on each box at a time Look for the case with the worst shadowing The box causing the worst case is the shadowing source or Bsrc Use Bsrc and the box opposite from it that lies directly in
- 14 -
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
LCD monitor General specification Panel Type 19 ldquo active matrix color TFT LCD
Display size 40824 mm (H) x25515 mm (V) PC interface 1) Video RGB analog 07V peak to peak
Sync TTL positive or negative Signal connector 15 pin Mini D type (standard VGA video)
24pin DVI-D type (DVI) (option) Front control power onoff with LED select adjustment (+-) Interface frequency Horizontal Frequency 30KHz ----80KHz Vertical Frequency 49Hz ------75Hz Plug amp play Support VESA DDC2B functions Power Input voltage Single phase 5060HZ 100VAC to 240VAC plusmn10 Total output power 55 Watt max
- 10 -
LCD Panel Specification
Note 1) Definition of Viewing Angle Viewing angle range (10leCR)
- 11 -
Note 2) Definition of Contrast Ratio (CR) Ratio of gray max(Gmax)gray min(Gmin) at the
center point of panel Luminance with all pixels white (Gmax)
CR= Luminance with all pixels black (Gmin)
Note 3) Definition of Response time Sum of TR TF
Note 4) After stabilizing and leaving the panel alone at a given temperature for 30 min the measurement should be executed Measurement should be executed n a stable windless and dark room30 min after lighting the back-light This should be measured in the center of screen Dual lamp current 130mA(65mA x2)(Refer to the note(1) in the page 14 for more information )
Environment condition Ta=25plusmn2degC
- 12 -
Optical characteristics measurement setup Notes 5) Definition of Luminance of White measure the luminance of white at center point
Notes 6)Definition of 9 points brightness uniformity (Measuring points Refer to the Note 5) AU Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Samsumg Bmax-Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Bmax Maximum brightness Bmin Minimum brightness Notes 7) Definition of Flicker level Flicker Voltage pp F = x 100 LMD Voltage dc diams One maximum value of three estimated values diams For this test an LMD(Light Measurement Device)is needed with adequate response time
to track any visible rate flicker component and with a voltage level output proportional To luminance intensity
- 13 -
diams Test Pattern For dot inversion Driving(Gray levels of foreground dots on the test panel Are G22G32and G45)
diams Test Point Center point of the display area N
Ta W
diams
diams
ote 8) Definition of Crosstalk (Refer to the VESA STD)
he calculation for shadowing is made from the 2 luminance measurements Gbkg and Lsh s follows Lmax -Lmin CT = x100 Lmin
here Lmax is the larger value of Gbkg or Lsh and Lmin is the smaller of the two To determine background and foreground levels (colors)first set the background to any gray scale or color level suitable for shadowing determination(Note that it may take several iterations of adjusting background level and box levels to determine the proper value for the background Next display the box levels to determine the proper value for the background level Look for shadowing in any direction from box E Independently vary the gray level (or color) of the background and box E until the worst case shadowing is observed This defines the background (Gbkg) and foreground (Gfg) levels to be maintained for the remainder of the test
One point only (the target) will be measured To determine that point proceed as follows Using the background and foreground gray levels of step1 (Gbkg and Gfg) Turn on each box at a time Look for the case with the worst shadowing The box causing the worst case is the shadowing source or Bsrc Use Bsrc and the box opposite from it that lies directly in
- 14 -
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
LCD Panel Specification
Note 1) Definition of Viewing Angle Viewing angle range (10leCR)
- 11 -
Note 2) Definition of Contrast Ratio (CR) Ratio of gray max(Gmax)gray min(Gmin) at the
center point of panel Luminance with all pixels white (Gmax)
CR= Luminance with all pixels black (Gmin)
Note 3) Definition of Response time Sum of TR TF
Note 4) After stabilizing and leaving the panel alone at a given temperature for 30 min the measurement should be executed Measurement should be executed n a stable windless and dark room30 min after lighting the back-light This should be measured in the center of screen Dual lamp current 130mA(65mA x2)(Refer to the note(1) in the page 14 for more information )
Environment condition Ta=25plusmn2degC
- 12 -
Optical characteristics measurement setup Notes 5) Definition of Luminance of White measure the luminance of white at center point
Notes 6)Definition of 9 points brightness uniformity (Measuring points Refer to the Note 5) AU Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Samsumg Bmax-Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Bmax Maximum brightness Bmin Minimum brightness Notes 7) Definition of Flicker level Flicker Voltage pp F = x 100 LMD Voltage dc diams One maximum value of three estimated values diams For this test an LMD(Light Measurement Device)is needed with adequate response time
to track any visible rate flicker component and with a voltage level output proportional To luminance intensity
- 13 -
diams Test Pattern For dot inversion Driving(Gray levels of foreground dots on the test panel Are G22G32and G45)
diams Test Point Center point of the display area N
Ta W
diams
diams
ote 8) Definition of Crosstalk (Refer to the VESA STD)
he calculation for shadowing is made from the 2 luminance measurements Gbkg and Lsh s follows Lmax -Lmin CT = x100 Lmin
here Lmax is the larger value of Gbkg or Lsh and Lmin is the smaller of the two To determine background and foreground levels (colors)first set the background to any gray scale or color level suitable for shadowing determination(Note that it may take several iterations of adjusting background level and box levels to determine the proper value for the background Next display the box levels to determine the proper value for the background level Look for shadowing in any direction from box E Independently vary the gray level (or color) of the background and box E until the worst case shadowing is observed This defines the background (Gbkg) and foreground (Gfg) levels to be maintained for the remainder of the test
One point only (the target) will be measured To determine that point proceed as follows Using the background and foreground gray levels of step1 (Gbkg and Gfg) Turn on each box at a time Look for the case with the worst shadowing The box causing the worst case is the shadowing source or Bsrc Use Bsrc and the box opposite from it that lies directly in
- 14 -
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Note 2) Definition of Contrast Ratio (CR) Ratio of gray max(Gmax)gray min(Gmin) at the
center point of panel Luminance with all pixels white (Gmax)
CR= Luminance with all pixels black (Gmin)
Note 3) Definition of Response time Sum of TR TF
Note 4) After stabilizing and leaving the panel alone at a given temperature for 30 min the measurement should be executed Measurement should be executed n a stable windless and dark room30 min after lighting the back-light This should be measured in the center of screen Dual lamp current 130mA(65mA x2)(Refer to the note(1) in the page 14 for more information )
Environment condition Ta=25plusmn2degC
- 12 -
Optical characteristics measurement setup Notes 5) Definition of Luminance of White measure the luminance of white at center point
Notes 6)Definition of 9 points brightness uniformity (Measuring points Refer to the Note 5) AU Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Samsumg Bmax-Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Bmax Maximum brightness Bmin Minimum brightness Notes 7) Definition of Flicker level Flicker Voltage pp F = x 100 LMD Voltage dc diams One maximum value of three estimated values diams For this test an LMD(Light Measurement Device)is needed with adequate response time
to track any visible rate flicker component and with a voltage level output proportional To luminance intensity
- 13 -
diams Test Pattern For dot inversion Driving(Gray levels of foreground dots on the test panel Are G22G32and G45)
diams Test Point Center point of the display area N
Ta W
diams
diams
ote 8) Definition of Crosstalk (Refer to the VESA STD)
he calculation for shadowing is made from the 2 luminance measurements Gbkg and Lsh s follows Lmax -Lmin CT = x100 Lmin
here Lmax is the larger value of Gbkg or Lsh and Lmin is the smaller of the two To determine background and foreground levels (colors)first set the background to any gray scale or color level suitable for shadowing determination(Note that it may take several iterations of adjusting background level and box levels to determine the proper value for the background Next display the box levels to determine the proper value for the background level Look for shadowing in any direction from box E Independently vary the gray level (or color) of the background and box E until the worst case shadowing is observed This defines the background (Gbkg) and foreground (Gfg) levels to be maintained for the remainder of the test
One point only (the target) will be measured To determine that point proceed as follows Using the background and foreground gray levels of step1 (Gbkg and Gfg) Turn on each box at a time Look for the case with the worst shadowing The box causing the worst case is the shadowing source or Bsrc Use Bsrc and the box opposite from it that lies directly in
- 14 -
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Optical characteristics measurement setup Notes 5) Definition of Luminance of White measure the luminance of white at center point
Notes 6)Definition of 9 points brightness uniformity (Measuring points Refer to the Note 5) AU Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Samsumg Bmax-Bmin BUNI= X 100 Bmax Bmax Maximum brightness Bmin Minimum brightness Notes 7) Definition of Flicker level Flicker Voltage pp F = x 100 LMD Voltage dc diams One maximum value of three estimated values diams For this test an LMD(Light Measurement Device)is needed with adequate response time
to track any visible rate flicker component and with a voltage level output proportional To luminance intensity
- 13 -
diams Test Pattern For dot inversion Driving(Gray levels of foreground dots on the test panel Are G22G32and G45)
diams Test Point Center point of the display area N
Ta W
diams
diams
ote 8) Definition of Crosstalk (Refer to the VESA STD)
he calculation for shadowing is made from the 2 luminance measurements Gbkg and Lsh s follows Lmax -Lmin CT = x100 Lmin
here Lmax is the larger value of Gbkg or Lsh and Lmin is the smaller of the two To determine background and foreground levels (colors)first set the background to any gray scale or color level suitable for shadowing determination(Note that it may take several iterations of adjusting background level and box levels to determine the proper value for the background Next display the box levels to determine the proper value for the background level Look for shadowing in any direction from box E Independently vary the gray level (or color) of the background and box E until the worst case shadowing is observed This defines the background (Gbkg) and foreground (Gfg) levels to be maintained for the remainder of the test
One point only (the target) will be measured To determine that point proceed as follows Using the background and foreground gray levels of step1 (Gbkg and Gfg) Turn on each box at a time Look for the case with the worst shadowing The box causing the worst case is the shadowing source or Bsrc Use Bsrc and the box opposite from it that lies directly in
- 14 -
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
diams Test Pattern For dot inversion Driving(Gray levels of foreground dots on the test panel Are G22G32and G45)
diams Test Point Center point of the display area N
Ta W
diams
diams
ote 8) Definition of Crosstalk (Refer to the VESA STD)
he calculation for shadowing is made from the 2 luminance measurements Gbkg and Lsh s follows Lmax -Lmin CT = x100 Lmin
here Lmax is the larger value of Gbkg or Lsh and Lmin is the smaller of the two To determine background and foreground levels (colors)first set the background to any gray scale or color level suitable for shadowing determination(Note that it may take several iterations of adjusting background level and box levels to determine the proper value for the background Next display the box levels to determine the proper value for the background level Look for shadowing in any direction from box E Independently vary the gray level (or color) of the background and box E until the worst case shadowing is observed This defines the background (Gbkg) and foreground (Gfg) levels to be maintained for the remainder of the test
One point only (the target) will be measured To determine that point proceed as follows Using the background and foreground gray levels of step1 (Gbkg and Gfg) Turn on each box at a time Look for the case with the worst shadowing The box causing the worst case is the shadowing source or Bsrc Use Bsrc and the box opposite from it that lies directly in
- 14 -
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
the shadow path That is the target box or Btgt Note that box Eight be either Bsrc or Btgt depending on the shadowing conditions but typically Bsrc and Btgt will be a pair of opposite boxes AampC or BampD Btgt will only be displayed for aligning the LMD It will be turned off for the actual measurement
diams The target box point (Btgt) will be measured with the source box (Bsrc) turned on then off
(Btgt is for alignment purpose only) Display the background only at level Gbkg Display Btgt determined in step 2 above Using the correct distance angle and measurement aperture align the LMD to the center of the Btgt Turn off Btgt With Gbkg set to its proper level measure the luminance (or color) Nextturn on the source box Bsrc Again measure at the center point of Btgt (without Btgt present) In this case the LMD will be measuring the shadowing level Lsh
Panel Relative Humidity
JP777-E02
Input Signals Video input
bull Type Analog R G B bull Input Impedance 75 ohm +- 2 bull Polarity Positive bull Amplitude 0 - 07 +- 005 Vp bull Display Color same as LCD panel
Sync input bull Signal separate horizontal and vertical sync or composite sync
which are TTL compatible bull Polarity positive and negative
- 15 -
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Interface frequency
The following frequency range is generalized by supported timing If the entered mode does not match the supported timing the display optimization will not be assured
bull Horizontal Frequency 30KHz --80KHz bull Vertical Frequency 49Hz -------75Hz
- 16 -
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Supported Timing TIMING
FH(KHZ) SYNC TOTAL ACTIVE SYNC FRONT BACK PIXEL
FV(HZ) POLARITY (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) WIDTH PORCH PORCH FOREQ(MHZ) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) (DOTLINE) 640x350 31469 + 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-350 70087 ndash 449 350 2 37 60 640x400 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-GRAPH 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 640x480 31469 ndash 800 640 96 16 48 25175 VGA-480 5994 ndash 525 480 2 10 33
3500 ndash 864 640 64 64 96 3024 640x480 APPLE MAC-480 6667 ndash 525 480 3 3 39 640x480 37861 ndash 832 640 40 16 120 315 VESA-480-72Hz 72809 ndash 520 480 3 1 20 640x480 375 ndash 840 640 64 16 120 315 VESA-480-75Hz 75 ndash 500 480 3 1 16 720x400 31469 ndash 900 720 108 18 54 28322 VGA-400-TEXT 70087 + 449 400 2 12 35 832x624 49725 ndash 1152 832 64 32 224 572832 APPLE MAC-800 7455 ndash 667 624 3 1 39 800x600 35156 + 1024 800 72 24 128 36 SVGA 5625 + 625 600 2 1 22 800x600 37879 + 1056 800 128 40 88 40 VESA-600-60Hz 60317 + 628 600 4 1 23 800x600 48077 + 1040 800 120 56 64 50 VESA-600-72Hz 72188 + 666 600 6 37 23 800x600 46875 + 1056 800 80 16 160 495 VESA-600-75Hz 75 + 625 600 3 1 21 1024x768 48363 ndash 1344 1024 136 24 160 65 XGA 60004 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 53964 + 1328 1024 176 16 112 71664 COMPAQ-XGA 66132 + 816 768 4 8 36 1024x768 56476 ndash 1328 1024 136 24 144 75 VESA-768-70Hz 70069 ndash 806 768 6 3 29 1024x768 60023 + 1312 1024 96 16 176 7875 VESA-768-75Hz 75029 + 800 768 3 1 28 1024x768 6024 ndash 1328 1024 96 32 176 80 APPLE MAC-768 7502 ndash 803 768 3 3 29 1152x864 60Hz
54054 + 1480 1152 96 40 192 80
59270 + 912 864 3 13 32 1152X864 70Hz
63851 + 1480 1152 96 32 200 94499
70012 + 912 864 3 1 44 6750 + 1600 1152 128 64 256 10800 1152x864
75Hz 7500 + 900 864 2 2 32 6000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 10800 1280x960
60Hz 6000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7000 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 12600 1280x960
70Hz 7000 + 1000 960 3 1 36 7500 + 1800 1280 112 96 312 13500 1280x960
75Hz 7500 + 1000 960 3 1 36 64 + 1688 1280 112 48 248 108 1280x1024
VESA-1024-60Hz 60 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 80 + 1688 1280 144 16 248 135 1280x1024
VESA-1024-75Hz 75 + 1066 1024 3 1 38 1440x900 55935 - 1904 1440 152 80 232 1065 VESA-1440-60Hz 59887 + 934 900 6 3 25 1440x900 70635 - 1936 1440 152 96 248 13675 VESA-1440-75Hz 75 + 942 900 6 3 33
Note Mode 640x350 640x400 and 720x400 will locate on middle position but cannot be expanded to full screen on vertical direction
- 17 -
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Support Modes There will be 27 total support modes to accommodate the above mode and other video modes within the frequency range of the monitor
85Hz refresh rate Support Monitor should display 85Hz refresh rate mode as emergency mode
Monitor should display ldquoOut of Rangerdquo warning menu at this mode
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15 SCL
- 18 -
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Color of plastic parts Blue (PC99)
15
10
5 1
6
11
D-sub connector
Digital Video Input Connector DVI ndash D (option)
Table 246 Pin assignment for DVI ndash D Connector
Pin ndash Assignment of DVI ndashD connector
1 TX2- 9 TX1- 17 TX0-
2 TX2+ 10 TX1+ 18 TX0+
3 Shield (TX2 TX4) 11 Shield (TX1 TX3) 19 Shield (TX0 TX5)
4 NC 12 NC 20 NC
5 NC 13 NC 21 NC
6 DDC-Serial Clock 14 +5V power ) 22 Shield (TXC)
7 DDC-Serial Data 15 Ground (+5V) 23 TXC+
8 No Connect 16 Hot plug detect 24 TXC-
) In case the power of the PC unit is switched off and the power of the monitor is switched on no voltage may occur at pin 14
- 19 -
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
MONITOR BLOCK DIAGRAM The LCD monitor will contain an main board an inverter power board key board and internal adapter which house the
flat panel control logic brightness control logic and DDC
The inverter board will drive the backlight of panel and the DC-DC conversion
The Adapter will provide thr 12V DC-power to inverter power board
Power board (include ACDCinverter)
- 20 -
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
BLOCK DIAGRAM
System Block Diagram
1
GM2621 (Analog) GM5621 (Dual)
- 21 -
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Monitor board layout
1
LABEL Component LABEL Component
U1 24LC02B CN1 D-SVB 15 PIN
U201 24LC02B CN201 DVI-D 24 PIN(Option)
U3 GM2621(Analog) GM5621(Dual ) CN3 EampT 2041-G08N-03B
U5 SPI FLASH CN5 P-TWO AFN300-N2G1Z 30P
U6 APL 1084 33V CN4 EampT 4500-8
U7 APL1117 18V CN501502503 Reserve
U8 APM4461
- 22 -
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Software flow chart
- 23 -
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
General Instructions Press the power button to turn the monitor on or off The other control buttons are located at front panel of the monitor
By changing these settings the picture can be adjusted to your personal preferences
The power cord should be connected
Connect the video cable from the monitor to the video card
Press the power button to turn on the monitor position The power indicator will light up
External Controls
1 Auto Adjust KeyExit 4 MENUENTER
2 lt 5 LED
3 gt 6 Power Key
- 24 -
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
System Installation
Connecting the Display Power off your computer
Connect one end of the signal cable to the LCD Monitorrsquos VGA port
Connect the other end of the signal cable to the VGA port on your PC
Make sure connections are secure
Connecting the AC Power Connect the power cord to the LCD Monitor
Connect the power cord to an AC power source
- 25 -
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Gap Spec The step between front bezel and back cover shall be within specification
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel concavity Back cover amp Bezel concavity
08mm le A le 13 mm 08mm le A le 13 mm
Back Cover amp Hinge Cover concavity
0mm le B le 05mm
- 26 -
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Base amp Neck concavity
0mm le C le 06mm
Top and Bottom Left and Right
Back cover amp Bezel step Back cover amp Bezel step
0mm le D le 08 mm 0mm le D le 08 mm
- 27 -
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
LCD Horizontally The angle between front bezel and LCD unit in bottom side should not large than 10mm
The distance of the LCD display unit from left side to right should not large than 40mm
- 28 -
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Tilt Base Rotation Tilt up 15 plusmn 2deg down 5 plusmn2deg Plastic Material For TCO99 Front Bezel PC+ABS Back Cover PC+ABS The Others ABS 94HB For MPRII Front Bezel ABS 94V-0 Back Cover ABS 94V-0 The Others ABS 94HB GAP Spec Gap between panel with bezel is 0 mm lt gap lt 15 mm
Swivel title noise spec When adjust the monitor angle the range should be limited -5ordm~ +15ordm and it should not have any noise
- 29 -
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
POWERInverter Board Description
This specification defined the performance and characteristic of powerinverter board
It supplies the following outputs
1) 5Vdc Logic power
2) 20Vinv Inverter power
Features Input Voltage 100 ~ 240 plusmn10Vac
Input Frequency 47 ~ 63Hz
Total output power 55Wmax
Inverter brightness adjustment Burst mode
Protection function auto-recovery type
Interface Signals Input
1 AC Inlet SA-4S-215 or compatible
2 J801 SCJ-0345-I-X-SSC 6Pin or compatible
Output Connector amp Pin Assignment 1 The connecter was pitch 20mm
PIN NO Function Function 1 +5V +5V supply for logic board 2 +5V +5V supply for logic board 3 VBRI Brightness signal for inverter 4 VEN Enable signal for inverter 5 GND Ground 6 GND Ground 7 NC NC 8 NC NC
- 30 -
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
2Inverter-side connecter SM02B-BHSS-1-TB(JST)
SM02(80)B-BHS-1(JST) or equivalent PIN NO Function Comment
1 Cth VBLH(High voltage) 2 Ctl VBLL(Low voltage)
Electrical Specification AC-DC Electrical specification 3411 Input Specification No Item Condition Min Typ Max Unit
1 Input Voltage ----- 100 --- 240 Vac
2 Input requency ----- 47 --- 63 Hz
3 Input Current ----- --- --- 10 Arms
Cold Start Vin=100Vrms --- 30 A0-P 4 Inrush Current
Cold Start Vin=240Vrms ---
--- 50 A0-P
5 Hold Up Time full load amp 100Vac input 10 --- --- ms
6 Turn on time Vin =110Vac --- 10 --- S
7 Efficiency Full load --- 70 ---
8 Consumption Vin=240Vac no load --- --- 1 W
- 31 -
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
3412 AC-DC Output Specification Tolerance Output Current
Output oltage --- MIN MAX Voltage Tolerance
+5Vdc +-5
005A 20A 525~475V dc
+20Vinv +15-5 0A 15A 23~19Vdc
Ripple --- 1 +5Vdc50mVp-p
+15Vinv150mVp-p
Noise
Measured at DC output
terminals which are
paralleled with a 10uf
Ecap amp01uf Ceramic
cap
2Band width is limited
within 20MHz
--- 3 +5Vdc150mVp-p
+15Vinv450mVp-p
Dynamic Load
Regulation
50~100 or 100~50
load change of any DC
output 50 duty of
--- plusmn5 ---
Over Under Power line onoff --- plusmn5 ---
+5Vdc load regulation test the +15Vinv loading at 20A
+20Vinv load regulation test the +5Vdc loading at 15A
3413 Protection function
1) SCP Short circuit protection must be acted on both outputs
2) OPP Should be protected when output power consumption is within 60W ~ 75W
Inverter Electrical Specification
For Hannstar HSD190MGW1
Condition Min Typ Max Unit
Input Voltage --- --- 20 --- V
Input Current --- --- 15 --- A
ON --- 33 --- V Backlight ONOFF
Control OFF --- 0 --- V
Brightness Adjust Min Luminance Max
Luminance --- 30 --- ---
Output Voltage Vin=15V Iout=75mA --- 650 --- Vrms
Brightness lamp current in 75mA 300 --- Cdmsup2
Output Current(Each
connector) Vbri=04V~33V --- 75 8 mA
Frequency --- 40 --- 60 KHz
Lamp start voltage 0 1650 --- --- Vrms
- 32 -
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Striking Time --- --- 1 --- S
Lamp Current Balance --- --- plusmn035 --- mA
Efficiency Vin=20V --- 80 ---
Operating Life Time --- 50000 --- --- Hr
The open lamp voltage is testes at output connector terminal
SAFETY Leakage Current 025mA 100Vac
Insulation Resistance more than 3M ohms while withstanding a voltage of 500Vac
Hi-Pot 3Kvac with using 3mA cut off current
- 33 -
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Power Consumption The monitor is equipped with a power-management according to the below
There is a delay of 5s hellip 7s before the transition from On-state to any power saving state to avoid
unintentionally entering of a power saving stage during display resolution and timing mode changes
Transition from any power saving state to another can be instantaneous
The recovery from Off-state requires no manual power on
Mode H-Sync V-Sync Video Pw-cons Indicator Rec time
Power-On on on active lt55W Green LED --
Power-off off off blanked lt 2 W Orange LED lt 5S
Switch-off lt 1 W Dark LED
SYNC On means Normal operation
SYNC Off means H sync F lt 10KHz duty cycle gt 25
V sync F lt 10Hz duty cycle gt 25
CONNECTORS CONTROLS Connectors - Power Monitor rear side AC Inlet
- Analog RGB Monitor rear side Data Cable 15-pin D-sub female male
Pin ndash Assignment of 15-pin D-sub
1 Red Video 9 +5V FOR DDC
2 Green Video 10 Detect
3 Blue Video 11 Serial Data for ISP
4 Serial Clock for ISP 12 Serial Data for DDC
5 Ground 13 H-Sync
6 Red Ground 14 V-Sync
7 Green Ground 15 Serial Clock for DDC
8 Blue Ground
Monitor Control Keys KEY Power Menu Adjust +- Vol +- Auto
Position Of Controls Position of all switches Bottom side of front bezel
Position of LED Bottom side of front bezel
- 34 -
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Chapter 2 Operating Instructions
CONTROLS
Control panel (monitor front panel) 1 Power LED will be green when monitor is on be amber when in power saving mode
2 Power ONOFF switch push to ON and push to OFF (toggle switch)
3 Function select
4 Adjust increase
5 Adjust decrease
6 Auto adjust
- 35 -
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Main OSD Menu
Outline
(option)
The description for control function Main Menu
Icon
Sub Menu
Item
Sub Menu
Icon
Description Adjustment
Range
Reset Value
Contrast
Contrast from Digital-register 0-100 Recall User
Contrast Value
Brightness
Backlight Adjustment 0-100 Recall User
Brightness Value
Focus
Adjust Picture Phase to reduce
Horizontal-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
Clock
Adjust picture Clock to reduce
Vertical-Line noise
0-100 Do Auto Config
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
picture
0-100 Do Auto Config
Warm NA Recall Warm Color Temperature
from EEPROM
NA
Cool NA Recall Cool Color Temperature from
EEPROM
NA
The Color
Temperature will be
set to User
User Red
Red Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
User Green
Green Gain Digital-register 0-100 100
User Blue
Blue Gain from Digital-register 0-100 100
- 36 -
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
English NA English NA 繁體中文 NA Deutsch NA Deutsch NA Franccedilais NA Franccedilais NA Espantildeol NA Espantildeol NA Italiano NA Italiano NA 繁體中文
or Русский
NA
简体中文 NA 简体中文
or Hollands
NA
日本語 NA 日本語
or Suomalainen
NA
The Language will be set to English
H Position
Adjust the horizontal position of the
OSD
0-100 50
V Position
Adjust the verticalposition of the
OSD
0-100 50
OSD Timeout
Adjust the OSD timeout 10-120 10
Auto Config NA Auto Adjust the HV Position Focus
and Clock of picture
NA NA
NA Source
Change
Analog and Digital source change(option) NA NA
Information NA Show the resolution HV frequency
and input port of current iput timing
NA NA
Reset NA Clear each old status of
Auto-configuration and set the color
temperature to Cool
NA NA
Exit NA Exit OSD NA NA
- 37 -
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
OSD Message Outline
The description for OSD Message
Item Description
Auto Config
Please Wait
When User Press Hot-Key ldquoAutordquo will show this message and the monitor do the auto config
function
Input Not
Supported
When the Hsync Frequency Vsync Frequency or Resolution is out of the monitor support range
will show this message This message will be flying
Cable Not
Connected
When the video cable is not connected will show this message This message will be flying
No Signal When the video cable is connected but there is no active signal input will show this message
then enter power saving
LOGO When the monitor is power on the LOGO will be showed in the center
- 38 -
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Item of Factory menu Vendor may customize design and add adjustment items Factory menu as far as all required items are included
1) Auto Color
Adjust each R G B contrast (gain) and offset
Method of auto adjust is depends on hardware
Adjusted value of R G B gain shall be used for initial value of Contrast in user menu
All value shall be adjustable manually
This function shall be located in 3 tag of Factory menu
2) Factory color temp data edit
Following data for color temp shall be editable manually
-color temp default preset No
3)Max
Adjust Brightness and Contrast value to Max
Note ldquoltrdquo and ldquogtrdquo and ldquo Powerrdquo key was pushed when normal display stage enter to Factory mode
- 39 -
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Plug and play
Plug amp play DDC2B feature This monitor is equipped with VESA DDC2B capabilities according to the VESA DDC STANDARD It allows the monitor
to inform the host system of its identity and depending on the level of DDC used communicate additional information
about its display capabilities The communication channel is defined in two levels DDC2B
The DDC2Bis a bidirectional data channel based on the I2C protocol The host can request EDID information over the
DDC2B channel
THIS MONITOR WILL APPEAR TO BE NON-FUNCTIONAL IF THERE IS NO VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL IN ORDER
FOR THIS MONITOR TO OPERATE PROPERLY THERE MUST BE A VIDEO INPUT SIGNAL
This monitor meets the Green monitor standards as set by the Video Electronics Standards Association(VESA) andor
the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and The Swedish Confederation Employees (NUTEK) This
feature is designed to conserve electrical energy by reducing power consumption when there is no video-input signal
present When there is no video input signal this monitor following a time-out period will automatically switch to an
OFF mode This reduces the monitorrsquos internal power supply consumption After the video input signal is restored full
power is restored and the display is automatically redrawn The appearance is similar to a ldquoScreen Saverrdquo feature
except the display is completely off The display is restored by pressing a key on the keyboard or clicking the mouse
Using The Right Power Cord
The accessory power cord for the Northern American region is the wallet plug with NEMA 5-15 style and is UL listed
and CSA labeled The voltage rating for the power cord shall be 125 volt AC
Supplied with units intended for connection to power outlet of personal computer Please use a cord set consisting of a
minimum No 18 AWG type SJT or SVT three conductors flexible cord One end terminates with a grounding type
attachment plug rated 10A 250VCEE-22 male configuration The other end terminates with a molded-on type
connector body rated 10A 250V having standard CEE-22 female configuration
Please note that power supply card needs to use VDE 0602 0625 0821 approval power cord in European counties
- 40 -
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
White Color Temperature White color temperature is 4 preset as 9300 75006500 and User
Default value of user color should be user which is maximum setting for panel
Target of color setting
Color
Temp
Color Coordinate Tolerance Color Coordinate Tolerance
x y ursquo vrsquo
9300K 0283 0297 +003 0189 0446 ursquovrsquo lt 001
6500K 0313 0329 +003 0198 0469 ursquovrsquo lt 001
User - - - - -
) TCOrsquo0X A261 requirement
User should follow ldquoMicrosoft Windows Color Quality Specification for Liquid Crystal Display OEMrsquosrdquo
(httpwwwmicrosoftcomhwdevtechcolorColorTestasp)
41
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Chapter 3 Machine Disassembly and Replacement
Disassembly Procedure
Disassemble the base 1 Remove the neck cover
2 Remove the four screws to release the hinge
3 Remove the base
Disassemble the chassis 1 Remove the four screws to release the back cover
2 Remove the two screws to release the EMI cover from chassis 3 Remove the two screws from VGA connector 4 Then take the chassis
5 Remove the two screws from bezel
6 To separate the chassis and bezel
7 Remove the four screws from chassis and release the panel
42
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Disassemble the main board 1 Disassemble audio line from power board
2 Disassemble two VL-VK lines from VL board
3 Disassemble power line from VL board
4 Disassemble FPC line from VL board
5 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
6 Remove the three screws from Chassis and release the main board
Disassemble the power board 1 Disassemble two voltage lines from power board
2 Remove the one screw to release line from Chassis
3 Remove the three screws from Chassis
4 Remove the two screws to release power board from Chassis
5 Then take the power board from the chassia
Disassemble the key board 1 Remove the one screw to release VK board from bezel 2 Disassemble the two speaker lines from VK board
43
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Disassemble the speakers 1 Remove the two screws to release line and VK board from bezel
2 Remove the two screws to release line and chassis from bezel
3 Remove the four screws from bezel
44
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Main Procedure
45
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Power Circuit and Backlights Troubleshooting
46
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Performance Troubleshooting
47
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Function Troubleshooting
48
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Chapter 5 Connector Information
Video input Connector Analog Video input Connector 15pins mini D-Sub
Table 245 Pin assignment for D-sub connector
PIN NO
Separate Sync
1 RED VIDEO
2 GREEN VIDEO
3 BLUE VIDEO
4 GROUND
5 GROUND
6 RED GROUND
7 GREEN GROUND
8 BLUE GROUND
9 PC5V (+5V DDC)
10 CABLE DETECTION
11 GROUND
12 SDA
13 HSYNC
14 VSYNC
15
10
5 1
6
11
15 SCL
49
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Chapter 6 FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) list This chapter gives you the FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) listing in global configurations of AL1916 Refer to this
chapter whenever ordering for parts to repair or for RMA (Return Merchandise Authorization)
NOTE Please note WHEN ORDERING FRU PARTS that you should check the most up-to-date information available
on your regional web or channel(httpaicslacercomtwspl) For whatever reasons a part number change is
made it will not be noted in the printed Service Guide For ACER-AUTHORIZED CERVICE PROVIDERS your
Acer office may have a DIFFERENT part number code to those given in the FRU list of this printed Service
Guide You MUST use the local FRU list provided by your regional Acer office to order FRU parts repair and
service of customer machines
NOTE To scrap or to return the defective parts you should follow the local government ordinance or regulations on
how best to dispose it or follow the rules set by your regional Acer office on how to return it
50
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
51
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Part list No Photo Part Name Part No
52
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
Chapter 7 Schematic Diagram After the schematic diagrams have been converted to pdf format the images below may not be clear enough Please double click the attachment icons below to open the schematic source files Schematic PCBA Schematic Power+IB Schematic KB
53
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
LCD Monitor Design Principle
CONTENTS
Schematic Name Sheet Date Comments
Approval Organization DateSignature
Compal
REVISION HISTORY
Author Version
0BOB SHY2
3
4
5
6
7
8
01_Reversion history
02_D-SUB Input
Mch 072005
Mch 07 2005The mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
03_Scaler
04_IO CONTROL And POWER
05_PANEL INTERFACE
06_DVI Inputs
07_Audio
OCT242005 BOB SHY 0A1Reserve TO-263 package for U62Reserve +5V for CN43Modify through hole form pitch125mm to pitch 08mm4Add earphone circuit(CN503C530C531R532R533)
Initial Release
DEC092005 BOB SHY 0B2Add R83R84 for audio detect function
3Add R233 for write enable function of DDC IC
4Add dual package for C57(pitch 35amp5mm)
5Change R50 from 22K to 33KC63 form047u to 22u
Jan092006 BOB SHY 1
1Shift C531 to away form the PCBs edge
1Add over resist for all DIP throughhole2R503 from 22K to 24K2Change C63 from 22uF to 10uF(MJ777)
401ADI 1A
Schematic PCBA CTRLB VL-924
A3
2 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
ESD parts
V-SYAC amp H-SYNC BUFFER
VGA INPUT INTERFANCE
EDID - D sub
2 CA2
3 CC
1 CA1
BAT54CBAV99L
The mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
R17
XTJ 0
R13
X
R14
MJ 47
X
10K
EDID SETTING
Reserve for ESD
401ADI 1A
Schematic PCBA CTRLB VL-924
A4
3 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
DDC-5VCC-A
DDC-5VCC-A
VGA_SCLVGA_SDA
VGA_SCL
VSYNC
HSYNC
VSYNC
PC-RED
PC-GREEN
BLUE-
RED+
RED-
GREEN-
BLUE+
GREEN+PC-BLUE
PC-GREEN
PC-BLUEPC-RED
AHSYNC
VSYNC AVSYNC
HSYNC
HSYNC
VGA_DET
VGA_SDA
VGA_SCL
VGA_SDA
GREEN+ 3
RED- 3
BLUE+ 3
RED+ 3
BLUE- 3
GREEN- 3
VGA_DET 3
VGA_SDA 3VGA_SCL 3
AHSYNC 3
AVSYNC 3
VGA_SDA 3VGA_SCL 3
VGA_DET 3
DDCWP 3 +5V
GND GND GND
GND
GND
GNDGND
GNDGND
GND
GND
GND GND GNDGND
GND
+5V
GNDGND
GND
R15 4712
C3 001uF1 2
C1 001uF1 2
R1 471 2
R10
845
12
R12
10K
12
D2
Z56V
12
C4 001uF1 2
C7
01uF
12
R7
75_1
12
R19
2K2
12
D3
Z56V
12
D1 BAT54C
1
23
CA1
CA2CC
L5 FCM1608K-102T02
1 2
R17
NC0
12
C6 001uF1 2
D6
Z56V
12
D5
Z56V
12R13
10KNC
12
R18 1001 2
C10
01uF
12
C11
27pF
12
R16 4712
R5
75_1
12
L2 1608-300LMI1 2
L3 1608-300LMI1 2
R6
75_1
12
R20 1001 2
ZD1 PRIR5V0U4AD
1
52
3
6
4
C9
01uF
12
R8
845
12
L1 1608-300LMI1 2
R2 471 2
C2 001uF1 2
D4
Z56V
12
R9
845
12
L4 FCM1608K-102T02
1 2
CN1
15P FEMALP RA BLU T15MM
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15R4 471 2
R11
10K
12
C12
27pF
12
C5 001uF1 2
R14 47NC12
R21
2K2
12
U1
24LC02
12 7
4
8
3 65
NCNC WP
GND
VCC
NC SCLSDA
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
Close to respective power Pins
Close to respective power Pins
Close to respective power Pins
The mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
TxDRxD
ReserveforG-PROBE
DNP
LBADC_RET
New Add
Close to respective power Pins
TJW AUDIO
MJ
AUDIO DETECTR83
X
4K7
X
TJWO AUDIO
R84
X
4K7
X
401ADI 1A
Schematic PCBA CTRLB VL-924
B
4 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
GPO_3UART_DOGPO_2UART_DI
AUDIO_VOLRESET
RXEC+
SPI_DO
GPO_1
RXE2-
RXO3+
RXO2-
BRIGHTNESS
RXE0+
RXO2+
RXE3-
SPI_DI
RXE3+
RXEC-
GPO_0
PPWR
RXO1+
SPI_CSn
RXE1+RXE1-
RXO0-
PBIAS
RESET
RXOC+
GPO_3UART_DO
RXO1-
RXOC-
RXE2+
RESET
SPI_CLK
GPO_2UART_DI
RXE0-
RXO3-
RXO0+
DDC_SCL_DVIDDC_SDA_DVI
VGA_SDAVGA_SCL
KEY_FUN- 4
KEY_FUN+ 4
LED_B 4
KEY_VAL_DEC 4
KEY_AUTO 4
KEY_ONOFF 4
KEY_VAL_INC 4
RX1-Rx0+
RXC-
RX0-
RX1+
RXC+
RX2-RX2+
DDC_SDA_DVIDDC_SCL_DVI
AUDIO_VOL8
VGA_DET
AUDIO_PD 8
BLUE-2
T2P 4
T7P 4
T0M 4
T4P 4
T3M 4
VGA_SDA2
T3P 4
T7M 4
AVSYNC2
GREEN-2
TCLK1P 4
T5P 4
PPWR 5
TCLK1M 4
T4M 4
BLUE+2
DDCWP 2
GREEN+2
T0P 4
T6P 4
T2M 4
PBIAS 4
T5M 4
BRIGHTNESS4
RED+2
TCLK2M 4
AHSYNC2
LED_G 4
T1P 4T1M 4
TCLK2P 4
T6M 4
VGA_SCL2
RED-2
DVI_CAB
33V_AVDD
33V_DVDD
GND
GND
+33V_VDD
GND
33VA_LV
+18V_VDD
+33V_VDD 33VA_RPLL
GND
18V_AVDD
GND
GND18V_DVDD
33VA_RPLL 33V_AVDD
GND
GND
33V_DVDD 33V_DVDD
33V_AVDD
GND
18V_DVDD33VA_LV 33V_DVDD 18V_AVDD33V_AVDD
GND
+5V
GND
GND
33V_DVDD
+5V
GND
33V_DVDD
GND
33V_DVDD
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
33V_DVDD
GND
33VA_RPLL+5V
GND
33V_DVDD
C35
01uF
CN2
HDR 4 RT ANGLE
1234
R644K7
X114318 MHz
C8
01uF
12
C18
01uF
L9
JKMT_B201212K800TM
R67 47
12
R63 4K7
R31
820K
R3810K
R560
R62 9K1
C31
01uF
R654K7
C38
01uF
R29 4K7
R66 4712
C48
001uF
C20
01uF
C43
01uF
C39
01uF R28 4K7
R594K7
R26 249
C15
01uF
L8
JKMT_B201212K800TMC32
100uF16V
U2
MCP809-45VSOT-23B
3
2
1
VCC
RSTN
GND
C28
01uF
R22562K 1
R79 82K
R32
820K
C19
01uF
L6
JKMT_B201212K800TMC13
20pF
R77 2K2
U3
gm5621
QFP12805
56
49
50
3334
36373839
35
40
62
60
96
119
100
61
109
8
543
6
7
9493
52
127
125124123
51
3231
13141516
85
1920
11
99
59
97
103
104
105
106
108
109
110
111
8990
6564
121120
122
126
128
57
58
63
6667
69
7273757680818384
107
112113114115
126 48
1755118
87
95 98 102
91 116
53101
92 82 74 2 25 47
68 71 77 79
86 78 70
18 54 88 117
12
21222324
27
2930
414243444546
28
GPO_1
PBIAS
PWM0GPO_4
O_CLKP_LVO_CLKN_LV
O_CH2N_LVO_CH1P_LVO_CH1N_LVO_CH0P_LV
O_CH2P_LV
O_CH0N_LV
SPI_DO
SPI_CLK
GREEN+
PWM1GPO_5
RED-
SPI_DI
E_CLKN_LVE_CLKP_LV
E_CH3N_LV
RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED
RESERVED
E_CH3P_LV
BLUE-BLUE+
CR
VSS
PPWR
GPIO_13GPIO_12GPIO_11
GPO_0
O_CH3N_LVO_CH3P_LV
E_CH1P_LVE_CH1N_LVE_CH0P_LVE_CH0N_LV
AVSS
_DVI
RESERVEDRESERVED
E_CH2P_LV
RED+
SPI_CSn
GREEN-
AVSS
_AD
C
AVD
D_A
DC
_18
VBUFC_RPLL
VDD
_RPL
L_18
XTAL
TCLK
AVD
D_R
PLL_
33
RESETn
HSYNCVSYNC
DDC_SDA_VGADDC_SCL_VGA
GPIO_9GPIO_8
GPIO_10
GPIO_14
AVD
D_B
IAS_
33
GPO_2
GPO_3
RVDD_33
DDC_SCL_DVIDDC_SDA_DVI
REXT
RX2+RX2-RX1+RX1-RX0+RX0-RXC+RXC-
VSS_
RPL
L
LBADC_VSSLBADC_IN3LBADC_IN2LBADC_IN1
AVSS
_BIA
S
VSS_
OU
TVS
S_O
UT
CVD
D_1
8C
VDD
_18
CVD
D_1
8C
VDD
_18
AVSS
_AD
CAV
SS_A
DC
AVSS
_AD
CR
VDD
_33
LBAD
C_V
DD
_33
RVD
D_3
3
AVD
D_A
DC
_33
AVD
D_A
DC
_33
AVD
D_D
VI_3
3AV
DD
_DVI
_33
VDD
_OU
T_33
VDD
_OU
T_33
VDD
_OU
T_33
AVSS
_DVI
AVSS
_DVI
AVSS
_DVI
AVSS
_DVI
AVD
D_D
VI_1
8AV
DD
_DVI
_18
AVD
D_D
VI_1
8
CR
VSS
CR
VSS
CR
VSS
CR
VSS
E_CH2N_LV
RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVEDRESERVED
RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED
RESERVED
C44
01uF
C24
01uF
C37
01uF
C26
01uF
C14
20pF
C46
01uF
R34 4K7
R570
C47
01uF
R83
NC4K7
R84
NC4K7
R80 32K
C42
100uF16V
C16
100uF16V
L7
JKMT_B201212K800TMC25
01uF
C33
01uF
L10
JKMT_B201212K800TM
R36 4K7
C22
100uF16V
R540R
C29 01uF
C30
100uF16V
R81
32K
C17
01uF
R30 4K7
R51 4712
R33 4K7
R584K7
C27
01uF
R3710K
C36
01uF
R60 9K1
R61 4K7
C34
100uF16V
C45
01uF
R5511K
R52 47
12
R35 4K7
C40
01uFL11
JKMT_B201212K800TM
U5
SPI FLASH
1234 5
678CE
SOWPVSS SI
SCKHOLD
VCC
C41
01uF
R82
1M
C23
01uF
TP2
R78 2K2
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A AThe mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
Keyboard ConnectorPOWER
TO223 TO252TO264
3IN
2OUT
2OUT
4 Vout
1ADJGND
APL1117
1ADJGND
SOT-252
3IN
SOT-223APL1085-33VCE
Pin9~Pin12 NCfor MJ serialmodel
401ADI 1A
Schematic PCBA CTRLB VL-924
B
5 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
LED_GOUTLED_BOUT
LED_B3
LED_G3KEY_ONOFF3KEY_FUN+3KEY_FUN-3
KEY_VAL_INC3KEY_VAL_DEC3KEY_AUTO3
BRIGHTNESS3 PBIAS 3
GND GND GND
33V_DVDD
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GNDGND
+5V
GND
GNDGND GND
+33V_VDD
+18V_VDD
GNDGNDGNDGND GND
+5V +33V_VDD
+5V
CN3
A2541-P254-8P
1 23 45 67 8
+ C55
220uF10V Q22SA3906
R39
4K7
U6APL1084-33CMAPL1085-33CE
12
3
GNDOUT
IN
R40
4K7
C51
01uF
CN4
EampT 4500-12
123456789
101112
R46 100C54
01uF
R45 100U7APL1117-18VCAPL1117-18UC
12
3
GNDOUT
IN
L13
JKMT_B201212K800TM
C56
01uF
R42
100
R41
100
+ C50
220uF10V
R44 1K
C53
01uF
Q12SA3906
R43
100
C49
01uF
+C64
47uF
C52
01uF
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
The mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
Panel Connector
1206
LCD PANEL INTERFACE (LVDS)
MJ999
22uF
47uF
C63
TJ777
MJ777 10uF401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
A3
6 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
PANEL_VDD
LCDON
LVDS_SEL3
LVDS_SEL2
PANEL_VDD
LVDS_SEL1
PANEL_VDD
PPWR3
LVDS_SEL1
TCLK1M
TCLK2P
T0M
TCLK2M
T6M
LVDS_SEL3
T3P T4M
T1M T1P
LVDS_SEL2
T3M
T2P
T0P
T4P
T7M
T5P
T7P
T2M
TCLK1P
T6P
T5M
GND GND
GNDGND GNDGND
PANEL_VDD+5V
GND GND GND
GND
U8
APM4461
1234 5
678S1
S2S3G D1
D2D3D4
R48
10K C61
01uF
R71
0
12
C58
001uF
R50 33K
R69
10K
12
C63
22uF47uF10uF
R49
470
R74
0
12
Q3
2SC2411K
L12JKMT_B201209J800TT
+ C57
470uF16V
R68
10K
12
+ C59
100uF
C60
01uF
R70
0
12
C62
1uF
CN5
LVDS CONA2003-P20-30P
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
R53
10K
12
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
DVI CONNECTOR
DIGITALDDC
21
3
BAV99
A7
Componenttop view
All Res and Cap size is 0603The mark to indicate that Part disuse
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV10
100
R206
10KMJ
R232
X
R233
X
TJ X
EDID SETTING
401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
B
7 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
RX0+
RX1+RX1-
RX2+
RXC+
RX2-
RX0-
DDC_SDA_DVIDDC_SCL_DVI
RXC-
DDCWP 3
DVI_CAB
GND
DVI_5V
GND
GND
33V_AVDD
GND
GND
GND
33V_AVDD
GND
DVI_5V+5V
BAV99
D2042
13
D209
BAT54C
1
23
CA1
CA2CC
R20210K
R233NC0
R229 1001
R228 1001
R231 1001
R224 1001
R20610KNC
R230 1001
BAV99
D2052
13
R227 1001
R20310K
U201
24AA02
4
8123
765GND
VCCA0A1A2
WPSCLSDA
D210
Z56V
12
R204 47
C201
01uF
R205 47
BAV99
D2062
13
BAV99
D2022
13BAV99
D2012
13
R232100NC
12
BAV99
D2072
13
CN201
DVI-D
12345678
910111213141516
1718192021222324
34
33 RX2-RX2+GNDRX4-RX4+
SCLSDA
VS
RX1-RX1+GNDRX3-RX3+
5VGND
HP
RX0-RX0+GNDRX5-RX5+GND
RXC+RXC-
Shell
Shell
BAV99
D2082
13
BAV99
D2032
13
R201 10K
R225 1001
C209
01uF
D211
Z56V
12
R226 1001
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
All Res and Cap size is 0603The mark to indicate that Part disuse
FOR MJ SERIAL MODEL ONLY
MJ
TJ WAUDIO
R506 R535 C530R509 R533R534 R532 C531R507
100K 100K100K11K 1K1K 220U 220UX
X X X X X100K X 100K 0
AUDIOSETTING
AUDIO OUTPUT1K=02W 47K=1W
R517
1K
47K
401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
Custom
8 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
R+R-
L+L-
RIGHT_IN
LEFT_IN
HL+
HR+
AUDIO_VOL 3
AUDIO_PD
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GNDAUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GNDAUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
GNDAUDIO_GND
R505 0
R509 100KNC
U501TPA6011
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24PGND
ROUT-
PVDD
RHPIN
RLINEIN
RIN
VDD
LIN
LLINEIN
LHPIN
PVDD
LOUT- PGND
LOUT+
SHUT DOWN
FADE
BYPASS
AGND
SEMAX
SEDIFF
VOLUME
HPLINE
SEBTL
ROUT+
C504 033uF
L503JKMT_B201212K800TM
R501
47k
Q502
2SC2411K
+
C530 220uF10VNC
Q501
MMBT3904B
EC
R504 22K
C505 033uF
C501
01uF
R521 10K1 2
+ C509
22U
R507 11K100K
CN501
PHONEJACK STEREO
2
31
L501JKMT_B201212K800TM
R532
1KNC
CN502
CON-5
12345
12345
R502
47k
R508 100K
R515 100K
+
C531 220uF10VNC
C503 033uF
R533
1KNC
C507
01uF
C506 033uF
R535
NC0
L502 B201210K800TM
R534
100KNC
R522
10K
12
R516
22K
+ C502
470uF63V
R517 1K47K
C510
01uF
R510 100K C511
1uF
R503 24K
R520 01 2
R506 100KNC
CN503
CON-4NC
1234
1234
R51810K
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
ESD parts
V-SYAC amp H-SYNC BUFFER
VGA INPUT INTERFANCE
EDID - D sub
2 CA2
3 CC
1 CA1
BAT54CBAV99L
The mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
R17
XTJ 0
R13
X
R14
MJ 47
X
10K
EDID SETTING
Reserve for ESD
401ADI 1A
Schematic PCBA CTRLB VL-924
A4
3 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
DDC-5VCC-A
DDC-5VCC-A
VGA_SCLVGA_SDA
VGA_SCL
VSYNC
HSYNC
VSYNC
PC-RED
PC-GREEN
BLUE-
RED+
RED-
GREEN-
BLUE+
GREEN+PC-BLUE
PC-GREEN
PC-BLUEPC-RED
AHSYNC
VSYNC AVSYNC
HSYNC
HSYNC
VGA_DET
VGA_SDA
VGA_SCL
VGA_SDA
GREEN+ 3
RED- 3
BLUE+ 3
RED+ 3
BLUE- 3
GREEN- 3
VGA_DET 3
VGA_SDA 3VGA_SCL 3
AHSYNC 3
AVSYNC 3
VGA_SDA 3VGA_SCL 3
VGA_DET 3
DDCWP 3 +5V
GND GND GND
GND
GND
GNDGND
GNDGND
GND
GND
GND GND GNDGND
GND
+5V
GNDGND
GND
R15 4712
C3 001uF1 2
C1 001uF1 2
R1 471 2
R10
845
12
R12
10K
12
D2
Z56V
12
C4 001uF1 2
C7
01uF
12
R7
75_1
12
R19
2K2
12
D3
Z56V
12
D1 BAT54C
1
23
CA1
CA2CC
L5 FCM1608K-102T02
1 2
R17
NC0
12
C6 001uF1 2
D6
Z56V
12
D5
Z56V
12R13
10KNC
12
R18 1001 2
C10
01uF
12
C11
27pF
12
R16 4712
R5
75_1
12
L2 1608-300LMI1 2
L3 1608-300LMI1 2
R6
75_1
12
R20 1001 2
ZD1 PRIR5V0U4AD
1
52
3
6
4
C9
01uF
12
R8
845
12
L1 1608-300LMI1 2
R2 471 2
C2 001uF1 2
D4
Z56V
12
R9
845
12
L4 FCM1608K-102T02
1 2
CN1
15P FEMALP RA BLU T15MM
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
10
11
12
13
14
15R4 471 2
R11
10K
12
C12
27pF
12
C5 001uF1 2
R14 47NC12
R21
2K2
12
U1
24LC02
12 7
4
8
3 65
NCNC WP
GND
VCC
NC SCLSDA
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
Close to respective power Pins
Close to respective power Pins
Close to respective power Pins
The mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
TxDRxD
ReserveforG-PROBE
DNP
LBADC_RET
New Add
Close to respective power Pins
TJW AUDIO
MJ
AUDIO DETECTR83
X
4K7
X
TJWO AUDIO
R84
X
4K7
X
401ADI 1A
Schematic PCBA CTRLB VL-924
B
4 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
GPO_3UART_DOGPO_2UART_DI
AUDIO_VOLRESET
RXEC+
SPI_DO
GPO_1
RXE2-
RXO3+
RXO2-
BRIGHTNESS
RXE0+
RXO2+
RXE3-
SPI_DI
RXE3+
RXEC-
GPO_0
PPWR
RXO1+
SPI_CSn
RXE1+RXE1-
RXO0-
PBIAS
RESET
RXOC+
GPO_3UART_DO
RXO1-
RXOC-
RXE2+
RESET
SPI_CLK
GPO_2UART_DI
RXE0-
RXO3-
RXO0+
DDC_SCL_DVIDDC_SDA_DVI
VGA_SDAVGA_SCL
KEY_FUN- 4
KEY_FUN+ 4
LED_B 4
KEY_VAL_DEC 4
KEY_AUTO 4
KEY_ONOFF 4
KEY_VAL_INC 4
RX1-Rx0+
RXC-
RX0-
RX1+
RXC+
RX2-RX2+
DDC_SDA_DVIDDC_SCL_DVI
AUDIO_VOL8
VGA_DET
AUDIO_PD 8
BLUE-2
T2P 4
T7P 4
T0M 4
T4P 4
T3M 4
VGA_SDA2
T3P 4
T7M 4
AVSYNC2
GREEN-2
TCLK1P 4
T5P 4
PPWR 5
TCLK1M 4
T4M 4
BLUE+2
DDCWP 2
GREEN+2
T0P 4
T6P 4
T2M 4
PBIAS 4
T5M 4
BRIGHTNESS4
RED+2
TCLK2M 4
AHSYNC2
LED_G 4
T1P 4T1M 4
TCLK2P 4
T6M 4
VGA_SCL2
RED-2
DVI_CAB
33V_AVDD
33V_DVDD
GND
GND
+33V_VDD
GND
33VA_LV
+18V_VDD
+33V_VDD 33VA_RPLL
GND
18V_AVDD
GND
GND18V_DVDD
33VA_RPLL 33V_AVDD
GND
GND
33V_DVDD 33V_DVDD
33V_AVDD
GND
18V_DVDD33VA_LV 33V_DVDD 18V_AVDD33V_AVDD
GND
+5V
GND
GND
33V_DVDD
+5V
GND
33V_DVDD
GND
33V_DVDD
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
33V_DVDD
GND
33VA_RPLL+5V
GND
33V_DVDD
C35
01uF
CN2
HDR 4 RT ANGLE
1234
R644K7
X114318 MHz
C8
01uF
12
C18
01uF
L9
JKMT_B201212K800TM
R67 47
12
R63 4K7
R31
820K
R3810K
R560
R62 9K1
C31
01uF
R654K7
C38
01uF
R29 4K7
R66 4712
C48
001uF
C20
01uF
C43
01uF
C39
01uF R28 4K7
R594K7
R26 249
C15
01uF
L8
JKMT_B201212K800TMC32
100uF16V
U2
MCP809-45VSOT-23B
3
2
1
VCC
RSTN
GND
C28
01uF
R22562K 1
R79 82K
R32
820K
C19
01uF
L6
JKMT_B201212K800TMC13
20pF
R77 2K2
U3
gm5621
QFP12805
56
49
50
3334
36373839
35
40
62
60
96
119
100
61
109
8
543
6
7
9493
52
127
125124123
51
3231
13141516
85
1920
11
99
59
97
103
104
105
106
108
109
110
111
8990
6564
121120
122
126
128
57
58
63
6667
69
7273757680818384
107
112113114115
126 48
1755118
87
95 98 102
91 116
53101
92 82 74 2 25 47
68 71 77 79
86 78 70
18 54 88 117
12
21222324
27
2930
414243444546
28
GPO_1
PBIAS
PWM0GPO_4
O_CLKP_LVO_CLKN_LV
O_CH2N_LVO_CH1P_LVO_CH1N_LVO_CH0P_LV
O_CH2P_LV
O_CH0N_LV
SPI_DO
SPI_CLK
GREEN+
PWM1GPO_5
RED-
SPI_DI
E_CLKN_LVE_CLKP_LV
E_CH3N_LV
RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED
RESERVED
E_CH3P_LV
BLUE-BLUE+
CR
VSS
PPWR
GPIO_13GPIO_12GPIO_11
GPO_0
O_CH3N_LVO_CH3P_LV
E_CH1P_LVE_CH1N_LVE_CH0P_LVE_CH0N_LV
AVSS
_DVI
RESERVEDRESERVED
E_CH2P_LV
RED+
SPI_CSn
GREEN-
AVSS
_AD
C
AVD
D_A
DC
_18
VBUFC_RPLL
VDD
_RPL
L_18
XTAL
TCLK
AVD
D_R
PLL_
33
RESETn
HSYNCVSYNC
DDC_SDA_VGADDC_SCL_VGA
GPIO_9GPIO_8
GPIO_10
GPIO_14
AVD
D_B
IAS_
33
GPO_2
GPO_3
RVDD_33
DDC_SCL_DVIDDC_SDA_DVI
REXT
RX2+RX2-RX1+RX1-RX0+RX0-RXC+RXC-
VSS_
RPL
L
LBADC_VSSLBADC_IN3LBADC_IN2LBADC_IN1
AVSS
_BIA
S
VSS_
OU
TVS
S_O
UT
CVD
D_1
8C
VDD
_18
CVD
D_1
8C
VDD
_18
AVSS
_AD
CAV
SS_A
DC
AVSS
_AD
CR
VDD
_33
LBAD
C_V
DD
_33
RVD
D_3
3
AVD
D_A
DC
_33
AVD
D_A
DC
_33
AVD
D_D
VI_3
3AV
DD
_DVI
_33
VDD
_OU
T_33
VDD
_OU
T_33
VDD
_OU
T_33
AVSS
_DVI
AVSS
_DVI
AVSS
_DVI
AVSS
_DVI
AVD
D_D
VI_1
8AV
DD
_DVI
_18
AVD
D_D
VI_1
8
CR
VSS
CR
VSS
CR
VSS
CR
VSS
E_CH2N_LV
RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVEDRESERVED
RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED
RESERVED
C44
01uF
C24
01uF
C37
01uF
C26
01uF
C14
20pF
C46
01uF
R34 4K7
R570
C47
01uF
R83
NC4K7
R84
NC4K7
R80 32K
C42
100uF16V
C16
100uF16V
L7
JKMT_B201212K800TMC25
01uF
C33
01uF
L10
JKMT_B201212K800TM
R36 4K7
C22
100uF16V
R540R
C29 01uF
C30
100uF16V
R81
32K
C17
01uF
R30 4K7
R51 4712
R33 4K7
R584K7
C27
01uF
R3710K
C36
01uF
R60 9K1
R61 4K7
C34
100uF16V
C45
01uF
R5511K
R52 47
12
R35 4K7
C40
01uFL11
JKMT_B201212K800TM
U5
SPI FLASH
1234 5
678CE
SOWPVSS SI
SCKHOLD
VCC
C41
01uF
R82
1M
C23
01uF
TP2
R78 2K2
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A AThe mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
Keyboard ConnectorPOWER
TO223 TO252TO264
3IN
2OUT
2OUT
4 Vout
1ADJGND
APL1117
1ADJGND
SOT-252
3IN
SOT-223APL1085-33VCE
Pin9~Pin12 NCfor MJ serialmodel
401ADI 1A
Schematic PCBA CTRLB VL-924
B
5 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
LED_GOUTLED_BOUT
LED_B3
LED_G3KEY_ONOFF3KEY_FUN+3KEY_FUN-3
KEY_VAL_INC3KEY_VAL_DEC3KEY_AUTO3
BRIGHTNESS3 PBIAS 3
GND GND GND
33V_DVDD
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GNDGND
+5V
GND
GNDGND GND
+33V_VDD
+18V_VDD
GNDGNDGNDGND GND
+5V +33V_VDD
+5V
CN3
A2541-P254-8P
1 23 45 67 8
+ C55
220uF10V Q22SA3906
R39
4K7
U6APL1084-33CMAPL1085-33CE
12
3
GNDOUT
IN
R40
4K7
C51
01uF
CN4
EampT 4500-12
123456789
101112
R46 100C54
01uF
R45 100U7APL1117-18VCAPL1117-18UC
12
3
GNDOUT
IN
L13
JKMT_B201212K800TM
C56
01uF
R42
100
R41
100
+ C50
220uF10V
R44 1K
C53
01uF
Q12SA3906
R43
100
C49
01uF
+C64
47uF
C52
01uF
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
The mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
Panel Connector
1206
LCD PANEL INTERFACE (LVDS)
MJ999
22uF
47uF
C63
TJ777
MJ777 10uF401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
A3
6 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
PANEL_VDD
LCDON
LVDS_SEL3
LVDS_SEL2
PANEL_VDD
LVDS_SEL1
PANEL_VDD
PPWR3
LVDS_SEL1
TCLK1M
TCLK2P
T0M
TCLK2M
T6M
LVDS_SEL3
T3P T4M
T1M T1P
LVDS_SEL2
T3M
T2P
T0P
T4P
T7M
T5P
T7P
T2M
TCLK1P
T6P
T5M
GND GND
GNDGND GNDGND
PANEL_VDD+5V
GND GND GND
GND
U8
APM4461
1234 5
678S1
S2S3G D1
D2D3D4
R48
10K C61
01uF
R71
0
12
C58
001uF
R50 33K
R69
10K
12
C63
22uF47uF10uF
R49
470
R74
0
12
Q3
2SC2411K
L12JKMT_B201209J800TT
+ C57
470uF16V
R68
10K
12
+ C59
100uF
C60
01uF
R70
0
12
C62
1uF
CN5
LVDS CONA2003-P20-30P
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
R53
10K
12
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
DVI CONNECTOR
DIGITALDDC
21
3
BAV99
A7
Componenttop view
All Res and Cap size is 0603The mark to indicate that Part disuse
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV10
100
R206
10KMJ
R232
X
R233
X
TJ X
EDID SETTING
401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
B
7 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
RX0+
RX1+RX1-
RX2+
RXC+
RX2-
RX0-
DDC_SDA_DVIDDC_SCL_DVI
RXC-
DDCWP 3
DVI_CAB
GND
DVI_5V
GND
GND
33V_AVDD
GND
GND
GND
33V_AVDD
GND
DVI_5V+5V
BAV99
D2042
13
D209
BAT54C
1
23
CA1
CA2CC
R20210K
R233NC0
R229 1001
R228 1001
R231 1001
R224 1001
R20610KNC
R230 1001
BAV99
D2052
13
R227 1001
R20310K
U201
24AA02
4
8123
765GND
VCCA0A1A2
WPSCLSDA
D210
Z56V
12
R204 47
C201
01uF
R205 47
BAV99
D2062
13
BAV99
D2022
13BAV99
D2012
13
R232100NC
12
BAV99
D2072
13
CN201
DVI-D
12345678
910111213141516
1718192021222324
34
33 RX2-RX2+GNDRX4-RX4+
SCLSDA
VS
RX1-RX1+GNDRX3-RX3+
5VGND
HP
RX0-RX0+GNDRX5-RX5+GND
RXC+RXC-
Shell
Shell
BAV99
D2082
13
BAV99
D2032
13
R201 10K
R225 1001
C209
01uF
D211
Z56V
12
R226 1001
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
All Res and Cap size is 0603The mark to indicate that Part disuse
FOR MJ SERIAL MODEL ONLY
MJ
TJ WAUDIO
R506 R535 C530R509 R533R534 R532 C531R507
100K 100K100K11K 1K1K 220U 220UX
X X X X X100K X 100K 0
AUDIOSETTING
AUDIO OUTPUT1K=02W 47K=1W
R517
1K
47K
401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
Custom
8 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
R+R-
L+L-
RIGHT_IN
LEFT_IN
HL+
HR+
AUDIO_VOL 3
AUDIO_PD
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GNDAUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GNDAUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
GNDAUDIO_GND
R505 0
R509 100KNC
U501TPA6011
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24PGND
ROUT-
PVDD
RHPIN
RLINEIN
RIN
VDD
LIN
LLINEIN
LHPIN
PVDD
LOUT- PGND
LOUT+
SHUT DOWN
FADE
BYPASS
AGND
SEMAX
SEDIFF
VOLUME
HPLINE
SEBTL
ROUT+
C504 033uF
L503JKMT_B201212K800TM
R501
47k
Q502
2SC2411K
+
C530 220uF10VNC
Q501
MMBT3904B
EC
R504 22K
C505 033uF
C501
01uF
R521 10K1 2
+ C509
22U
R507 11K100K
CN501
PHONEJACK STEREO
2
31
L501JKMT_B201212K800TM
R532
1KNC
CN502
CON-5
12345
12345
R502
47k
R508 100K
R515 100K
+
C531 220uF10VNC
C503 033uF
R533
1KNC
C507
01uF
C506 033uF
R535
NC0
L502 B201210K800TM
R534
100KNC
R522
10K
12
R516
22K
+ C502
470uF63V
R517 1K47K
C510
01uF
R510 100K C511
1uF
R503 24K
R520 01 2
R506 100KNC
CN503
CON-4NC
1234
1234
R51810K
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
Close to respective power Pins
Close to respective power Pins
Close to respective power Pins
The mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
TxDRxD
ReserveforG-PROBE
DNP
LBADC_RET
New Add
Close to respective power Pins
TJW AUDIO
MJ
AUDIO DETECTR83
X
4K7
X
TJWO AUDIO
R84
X
4K7
X
401ADI 1A
Schematic PCBA CTRLB VL-924
B
4 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
GPO_3UART_DOGPO_2UART_DI
AUDIO_VOLRESET
RXEC+
SPI_DO
GPO_1
RXE2-
RXO3+
RXO2-
BRIGHTNESS
RXE0+
RXO2+
RXE3-
SPI_DI
RXE3+
RXEC-
GPO_0
PPWR
RXO1+
SPI_CSn
RXE1+RXE1-
RXO0-
PBIAS
RESET
RXOC+
GPO_3UART_DO
RXO1-
RXOC-
RXE2+
RESET
SPI_CLK
GPO_2UART_DI
RXE0-
RXO3-
RXO0+
DDC_SCL_DVIDDC_SDA_DVI
VGA_SDAVGA_SCL
KEY_FUN- 4
KEY_FUN+ 4
LED_B 4
KEY_VAL_DEC 4
KEY_AUTO 4
KEY_ONOFF 4
KEY_VAL_INC 4
RX1-Rx0+
RXC-
RX0-
RX1+
RXC+
RX2-RX2+
DDC_SDA_DVIDDC_SCL_DVI
AUDIO_VOL8
VGA_DET
AUDIO_PD 8
BLUE-2
T2P 4
T7P 4
T0M 4
T4P 4
T3M 4
VGA_SDA2
T3P 4
T7M 4
AVSYNC2
GREEN-2
TCLK1P 4
T5P 4
PPWR 5
TCLK1M 4
T4M 4
BLUE+2
DDCWP 2
GREEN+2
T0P 4
T6P 4
T2M 4
PBIAS 4
T5M 4
BRIGHTNESS4
RED+2
TCLK2M 4
AHSYNC2
LED_G 4
T1P 4T1M 4
TCLK2P 4
T6M 4
VGA_SCL2
RED-2
DVI_CAB
33V_AVDD
33V_DVDD
GND
GND
+33V_VDD
GND
33VA_LV
+18V_VDD
+33V_VDD 33VA_RPLL
GND
18V_AVDD
GND
GND18V_DVDD
33VA_RPLL 33V_AVDD
GND
GND
33V_DVDD 33V_DVDD
33V_AVDD
GND
18V_DVDD33VA_LV 33V_DVDD 18V_AVDD33V_AVDD
GND
+5V
GND
GND
33V_DVDD
+5V
GND
33V_DVDD
GND
33V_DVDD
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
33V_DVDD
GND
33VA_RPLL+5V
GND
33V_DVDD
C35
01uF
CN2
HDR 4 RT ANGLE
1234
R644K7
X114318 MHz
C8
01uF
12
C18
01uF
L9
JKMT_B201212K800TM
R67 47
12
R63 4K7
R31
820K
R3810K
R560
R62 9K1
C31
01uF
R654K7
C38
01uF
R29 4K7
R66 4712
C48
001uF
C20
01uF
C43
01uF
C39
01uF R28 4K7
R594K7
R26 249
C15
01uF
L8
JKMT_B201212K800TMC32
100uF16V
U2
MCP809-45VSOT-23B
3
2
1
VCC
RSTN
GND
C28
01uF
R22562K 1
R79 82K
R32
820K
C19
01uF
L6
JKMT_B201212K800TMC13
20pF
R77 2K2
U3
gm5621
QFP12805
56
49
50
3334
36373839
35
40
62
60
96
119
100
61
109
8
543
6
7
9493
52
127
125124123
51
3231
13141516
85
1920
11
99
59
97
103
104
105
106
108
109
110
111
8990
6564
121120
122
126
128
57
58
63
6667
69
7273757680818384
107
112113114115
126 48
1755118
87
95 98 102
91 116
53101
92 82 74 2 25 47
68 71 77 79
86 78 70
18 54 88 117
12
21222324
27
2930
414243444546
28
GPO_1
PBIAS
PWM0GPO_4
O_CLKP_LVO_CLKN_LV
O_CH2N_LVO_CH1P_LVO_CH1N_LVO_CH0P_LV
O_CH2P_LV
O_CH0N_LV
SPI_DO
SPI_CLK
GREEN+
PWM1GPO_5
RED-
SPI_DI
E_CLKN_LVE_CLKP_LV
E_CH3N_LV
RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED
RESERVED
E_CH3P_LV
BLUE-BLUE+
CR
VSS
PPWR
GPIO_13GPIO_12GPIO_11
GPO_0
O_CH3N_LVO_CH3P_LV
E_CH1P_LVE_CH1N_LVE_CH0P_LVE_CH0N_LV
AVSS
_DVI
RESERVEDRESERVED
E_CH2P_LV
RED+
SPI_CSn
GREEN-
AVSS
_AD
C
AVD
D_A
DC
_18
VBUFC_RPLL
VDD
_RPL
L_18
XTAL
TCLK
AVD
D_R
PLL_
33
RESETn
HSYNCVSYNC
DDC_SDA_VGADDC_SCL_VGA
GPIO_9GPIO_8
GPIO_10
GPIO_14
AVD
D_B
IAS_
33
GPO_2
GPO_3
RVDD_33
DDC_SCL_DVIDDC_SDA_DVI
REXT
RX2+RX2-RX1+RX1-RX0+RX0-RXC+RXC-
VSS_
RPL
L
LBADC_VSSLBADC_IN3LBADC_IN2LBADC_IN1
AVSS
_BIA
S
VSS_
OU
TVS
S_O
UT
CVD
D_1
8C
VDD
_18
CVD
D_1
8C
VDD
_18
AVSS
_AD
CAV
SS_A
DC
AVSS
_AD
CR
VDD
_33
LBAD
C_V
DD
_33
RVD
D_3
3
AVD
D_A
DC
_33
AVD
D_A
DC
_33
AVD
D_D
VI_3
3AV
DD
_DVI
_33
VDD
_OU
T_33
VDD
_OU
T_33
VDD
_OU
T_33
AVSS
_DVI
AVSS
_DVI
AVSS
_DVI
AVSS
_DVI
AVD
D_D
VI_1
8AV
DD
_DVI
_18
AVD
D_D
VI_1
8
CR
VSS
CR
VSS
CR
VSS
CR
VSS
E_CH2N_LV
RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVEDRESERVED
RESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVEDRESERVED
RESERVED
C44
01uF
C24
01uF
C37
01uF
C26
01uF
C14
20pF
C46
01uF
R34 4K7
R570
C47
01uF
R83
NC4K7
R84
NC4K7
R80 32K
C42
100uF16V
C16
100uF16V
L7
JKMT_B201212K800TMC25
01uF
C33
01uF
L10
JKMT_B201212K800TM
R36 4K7
C22
100uF16V
R540R
C29 01uF
C30
100uF16V
R81
32K
C17
01uF
R30 4K7
R51 4712
R33 4K7
R584K7
C27
01uF
R3710K
C36
01uF
R60 9K1
R61 4K7
C34
100uF16V
C45
01uF
R5511K
R52 47
12
R35 4K7
C40
01uFL11
JKMT_B201212K800TM
U5
SPI FLASH
1234 5
678CE
SOWPVSS SI
SCKHOLD
VCC
C41
01uF
R82
1M
C23
01uF
TP2
R78 2K2
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A AThe mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
Keyboard ConnectorPOWER
TO223 TO252TO264
3IN
2OUT
2OUT
4 Vout
1ADJGND
APL1117
1ADJGND
SOT-252
3IN
SOT-223APL1085-33VCE
Pin9~Pin12 NCfor MJ serialmodel
401ADI 1A
Schematic PCBA CTRLB VL-924
B
5 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
LED_GOUTLED_BOUT
LED_B3
LED_G3KEY_ONOFF3KEY_FUN+3KEY_FUN-3
KEY_VAL_INC3KEY_VAL_DEC3KEY_AUTO3
BRIGHTNESS3 PBIAS 3
GND GND GND
33V_DVDD
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GNDGND
+5V
GND
GNDGND GND
+33V_VDD
+18V_VDD
GNDGNDGNDGND GND
+5V +33V_VDD
+5V
CN3
A2541-P254-8P
1 23 45 67 8
+ C55
220uF10V Q22SA3906
R39
4K7
U6APL1084-33CMAPL1085-33CE
12
3
GNDOUT
IN
R40
4K7
C51
01uF
CN4
EampT 4500-12
123456789
101112
R46 100C54
01uF
R45 100U7APL1117-18VCAPL1117-18UC
12
3
GNDOUT
IN
L13
JKMT_B201212K800TM
C56
01uF
R42
100
R41
100
+ C50
220uF10V
R44 1K
C53
01uF
Q12SA3906
R43
100
C49
01uF
+C64
47uF
C52
01uF
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
The mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
Panel Connector
1206
LCD PANEL INTERFACE (LVDS)
MJ999
22uF
47uF
C63
TJ777
MJ777 10uF401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
A3
6 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
PANEL_VDD
LCDON
LVDS_SEL3
LVDS_SEL2
PANEL_VDD
LVDS_SEL1
PANEL_VDD
PPWR3
LVDS_SEL1
TCLK1M
TCLK2P
T0M
TCLK2M
T6M
LVDS_SEL3
T3P T4M
T1M T1P
LVDS_SEL2
T3M
T2P
T0P
T4P
T7M
T5P
T7P
T2M
TCLK1P
T6P
T5M
GND GND
GNDGND GNDGND
PANEL_VDD+5V
GND GND GND
GND
U8
APM4461
1234 5
678S1
S2S3G D1
D2D3D4
R48
10K C61
01uF
R71
0
12
C58
001uF
R50 33K
R69
10K
12
C63
22uF47uF10uF
R49
470
R74
0
12
Q3
2SC2411K
L12JKMT_B201209J800TT
+ C57
470uF16V
R68
10K
12
+ C59
100uF
C60
01uF
R70
0
12
C62
1uF
CN5
LVDS CONA2003-P20-30P
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
R53
10K
12
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
DVI CONNECTOR
DIGITALDDC
21
3
BAV99
A7
Componenttop view
All Res and Cap size is 0603The mark to indicate that Part disuse
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV10
100
R206
10KMJ
R232
X
R233
X
TJ X
EDID SETTING
401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
B
7 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
RX0+
RX1+RX1-
RX2+
RXC+
RX2-
RX0-
DDC_SDA_DVIDDC_SCL_DVI
RXC-
DDCWP 3
DVI_CAB
GND
DVI_5V
GND
GND
33V_AVDD
GND
GND
GND
33V_AVDD
GND
DVI_5V+5V
BAV99
D2042
13
D209
BAT54C
1
23
CA1
CA2CC
R20210K
R233NC0
R229 1001
R228 1001
R231 1001
R224 1001
R20610KNC
R230 1001
BAV99
D2052
13
R227 1001
R20310K
U201
24AA02
4
8123
765GND
VCCA0A1A2
WPSCLSDA
D210
Z56V
12
R204 47
C201
01uF
R205 47
BAV99
D2062
13
BAV99
D2022
13BAV99
D2012
13
R232100NC
12
BAV99
D2072
13
CN201
DVI-D
12345678
910111213141516
1718192021222324
34
33 RX2-RX2+GNDRX4-RX4+
SCLSDA
VS
RX1-RX1+GNDRX3-RX3+
5VGND
HP
RX0-RX0+GNDRX5-RX5+GND
RXC+RXC-
Shell
Shell
BAV99
D2082
13
BAV99
D2032
13
R201 10K
R225 1001
C209
01uF
D211
Z56V
12
R226 1001
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
All Res and Cap size is 0603The mark to indicate that Part disuse
FOR MJ SERIAL MODEL ONLY
MJ
TJ WAUDIO
R506 R535 C530R509 R533R534 R532 C531R507
100K 100K100K11K 1K1K 220U 220UX
X X X X X100K X 100K 0
AUDIOSETTING
AUDIO OUTPUT1K=02W 47K=1W
R517
1K
47K
401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
Custom
8 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
R+R-
L+L-
RIGHT_IN
LEFT_IN
HL+
HR+
AUDIO_VOL 3
AUDIO_PD
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GNDAUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GNDAUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
GNDAUDIO_GND
R505 0
R509 100KNC
U501TPA6011
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24PGND
ROUT-
PVDD
RHPIN
RLINEIN
RIN
VDD
LIN
LLINEIN
LHPIN
PVDD
LOUT- PGND
LOUT+
SHUT DOWN
FADE
BYPASS
AGND
SEMAX
SEDIFF
VOLUME
HPLINE
SEBTL
ROUT+
C504 033uF
L503JKMT_B201212K800TM
R501
47k
Q502
2SC2411K
+
C530 220uF10VNC
Q501
MMBT3904B
EC
R504 22K
C505 033uF
C501
01uF
R521 10K1 2
+ C509
22U
R507 11K100K
CN501
PHONEJACK STEREO
2
31
L501JKMT_B201212K800TM
R532
1KNC
CN502
CON-5
12345
12345
R502
47k
R508 100K
R515 100K
+
C531 220uF10VNC
C503 033uF
R533
1KNC
C507
01uF
C506 033uF
R535
NC0
L502 B201210K800TM
R534
100KNC
R522
10K
12
R516
22K
+ C502
470uF63V
R517 1K47K
C510
01uF
R510 100K C511
1uF
R503 24K
R520 01 2
R506 100KNC
CN503
CON-4NC
1234
1234
R51810K
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A AThe mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
Keyboard ConnectorPOWER
TO223 TO252TO264
3IN
2OUT
2OUT
4 Vout
1ADJGND
APL1117
1ADJGND
SOT-252
3IN
SOT-223APL1085-33VCE
Pin9~Pin12 NCfor MJ serialmodel
401ADI 1A
Schematic PCBA CTRLB VL-924
B
5 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
LED_GOUTLED_BOUT
LED_B3
LED_G3KEY_ONOFF3KEY_FUN+3KEY_FUN-3
KEY_VAL_INC3KEY_VAL_DEC3KEY_AUTO3
BRIGHTNESS3 PBIAS 3
GND GND GND
33V_DVDD
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GNDGND
+5V
GND
GNDGND GND
+33V_VDD
+18V_VDD
GNDGNDGNDGND GND
+5V +33V_VDD
+5V
CN3
A2541-P254-8P
1 23 45 67 8
+ C55
220uF10V Q22SA3906
R39
4K7
U6APL1084-33CMAPL1085-33CE
12
3
GNDOUT
IN
R40
4K7
C51
01uF
CN4
EampT 4500-12
123456789
101112
R46 100C54
01uF
R45 100U7APL1117-18VCAPL1117-18UC
12
3
GNDOUT
IN
L13
JKMT_B201212K800TM
C56
01uF
R42
100
R41
100
+ C50
220uF10V
R44 1K
C53
01uF
Q12SA3906
R43
100
C49
01uF
+C64
47uF
C52
01uF
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
The mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
Panel Connector
1206
LCD PANEL INTERFACE (LVDS)
MJ999
22uF
47uF
C63
TJ777
MJ777 10uF401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
A3
6 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
PANEL_VDD
LCDON
LVDS_SEL3
LVDS_SEL2
PANEL_VDD
LVDS_SEL1
PANEL_VDD
PPWR3
LVDS_SEL1
TCLK1M
TCLK2P
T0M
TCLK2M
T6M
LVDS_SEL3
T3P T4M
T1M T1P
LVDS_SEL2
T3M
T2P
T0P
T4P
T7M
T5P
T7P
T2M
TCLK1P
T6P
T5M
GND GND
GNDGND GNDGND
PANEL_VDD+5V
GND GND GND
GND
U8
APM4461
1234 5
678S1
S2S3G D1
D2D3D4
R48
10K C61
01uF
R71
0
12
C58
001uF
R50 33K
R69
10K
12
C63
22uF47uF10uF
R49
470
R74
0
12
Q3
2SC2411K
L12JKMT_B201209J800TT
+ C57
470uF16V
R68
10K
12
+ C59
100uF
C60
01uF
R70
0
12
C62
1uF
CN5
LVDS CONA2003-P20-30P
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
R53
10K
12
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
DVI CONNECTOR
DIGITALDDC
21
3
BAV99
A7
Componenttop view
All Res and Cap size is 0603The mark to indicate that Part disuse
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV10
100
R206
10KMJ
R232
X
R233
X
TJ X
EDID SETTING
401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
B
7 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
RX0+
RX1+RX1-
RX2+
RXC+
RX2-
RX0-
DDC_SDA_DVIDDC_SCL_DVI
RXC-
DDCWP 3
DVI_CAB
GND
DVI_5V
GND
GND
33V_AVDD
GND
GND
GND
33V_AVDD
GND
DVI_5V+5V
BAV99
D2042
13
D209
BAT54C
1
23
CA1
CA2CC
R20210K
R233NC0
R229 1001
R228 1001
R231 1001
R224 1001
R20610KNC
R230 1001
BAV99
D2052
13
R227 1001
R20310K
U201
24AA02
4
8123
765GND
VCCA0A1A2
WPSCLSDA
D210
Z56V
12
R204 47
C201
01uF
R205 47
BAV99
D2062
13
BAV99
D2022
13BAV99
D2012
13
R232100NC
12
BAV99
D2072
13
CN201
DVI-D
12345678
910111213141516
1718192021222324
34
33 RX2-RX2+GNDRX4-RX4+
SCLSDA
VS
RX1-RX1+GNDRX3-RX3+
5VGND
HP
RX0-RX0+GNDRX5-RX5+GND
RXC+RXC-
Shell
Shell
BAV99
D2082
13
BAV99
D2032
13
R201 10K
R225 1001
C209
01uF
D211
Z56V
12
R226 1001
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
All Res and Cap size is 0603The mark to indicate that Part disuse
FOR MJ SERIAL MODEL ONLY
MJ
TJ WAUDIO
R506 R535 C530R509 R533R534 R532 C531R507
100K 100K100K11K 1K1K 220U 220UX
X X X X X100K X 100K 0
AUDIOSETTING
AUDIO OUTPUT1K=02W 47K=1W
R517
1K
47K
401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
Custom
8 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
R+R-
L+L-
RIGHT_IN
LEFT_IN
HL+
HR+
AUDIO_VOL 3
AUDIO_PD
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GNDAUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GNDAUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
GNDAUDIO_GND
R505 0
R509 100KNC
U501TPA6011
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24PGND
ROUT-
PVDD
RHPIN
RLINEIN
RIN
VDD
LIN
LLINEIN
LHPIN
PVDD
LOUT- PGND
LOUT+
SHUT DOWN
FADE
BYPASS
AGND
SEMAX
SEDIFF
VOLUME
HPLINE
SEBTL
ROUT+
C504 033uF
L503JKMT_B201212K800TM
R501
47k
Q502
2SC2411K
+
C530 220uF10VNC
Q501
MMBT3904B
EC
R504 22K
C505 033uF
C501
01uF
R521 10K1 2
+ C509
22U
R507 11K100K
CN501
PHONEJACK STEREO
2
31
L501JKMT_B201212K800TM
R532
1KNC
CN502
CON-5
12345
12345
R502
47k
R508 100K
R515 100K
+
C531 220uF10VNC
C503 033uF
R533
1KNC
C507
01uF
C506 033uF
R535
NC0
L502 B201210K800TM
R534
100KNC
R522
10K
12
R516
22K
+ C502
470uF63V
R517 1K47K
C510
01uF
R510 100K C511
1uF
R503 24K
R520 01 2
R506 100KNC
CN503
CON-4NC
1234
1234
R51810K
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
The mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
Panel Connector
1206
LCD PANEL INTERFACE (LVDS)
MJ999
22uF
47uF
C63
TJ777
MJ777 10uF401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
A3
6 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
PANEL_VDD
LCDON
LVDS_SEL3
LVDS_SEL2
PANEL_VDD
LVDS_SEL1
PANEL_VDD
PPWR3
LVDS_SEL1
TCLK1M
TCLK2P
T0M
TCLK2M
T6M
LVDS_SEL3
T3P T4M
T1M T1P
LVDS_SEL2
T3M
T2P
T0P
T4P
T7M
T5P
T7P
T2M
TCLK1P
T6P
T5M
GND GND
GNDGND GNDGND
PANEL_VDD+5V
GND GND GND
GND
U8
APM4461
1234 5
678S1
S2S3G D1
D2D3D4
R48
10K C61
01uF
R71
0
12
C58
001uF
R50 33K
R69
10K
12
C63
22uF47uF10uF
R49
470
R74
0
12
Q3
2SC2411K
L12JKMT_B201209J800TT
+ C57
470uF16V
R68
10K
12
+ C59
100uF
C60
01uF
R70
0
12
C62
1uF
CN5
LVDS CONA2003-P20-30P
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
9 10
11 12
13 14
15 16
17 18
19 20
21 22
23 24
25 26
27 28
29 30
R53
10K
12
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
DVI CONNECTOR
DIGITALDDC
21
3
BAV99
A7
Componenttop view
All Res and Cap size is 0603The mark to indicate that Part disuse
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV10
100
R206
10KMJ
R232
X
R233
X
TJ X
EDID SETTING
401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
B
7 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
RX0+
RX1+RX1-
RX2+
RXC+
RX2-
RX0-
DDC_SDA_DVIDDC_SCL_DVI
RXC-
DDCWP 3
DVI_CAB
GND
DVI_5V
GND
GND
33V_AVDD
GND
GND
GND
33V_AVDD
GND
DVI_5V+5V
BAV99
D2042
13
D209
BAT54C
1
23
CA1
CA2CC
R20210K
R233NC0
R229 1001
R228 1001
R231 1001
R224 1001
R20610KNC
R230 1001
BAV99
D2052
13
R227 1001
R20310K
U201
24AA02
4
8123
765GND
VCCA0A1A2
WPSCLSDA
D210
Z56V
12
R204 47
C201
01uF
R205 47
BAV99
D2062
13
BAV99
D2022
13BAV99
D2012
13
R232100NC
12
BAV99
D2072
13
CN201
DVI-D
12345678
910111213141516
1718192021222324
34
33 RX2-RX2+GNDRX4-RX4+
SCLSDA
VS
RX1-RX1+GNDRX3-RX3+
5VGND
HP
RX0-RX0+GNDRX5-RX5+GND
RXC+RXC-
Shell
Shell
BAV99
D2082
13
BAV99
D2032
13
R201 10K
R225 1001
C209
01uF
D211
Z56V
12
R226 1001
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
All Res and Cap size is 0603The mark to indicate that Part disuse
FOR MJ SERIAL MODEL ONLY
MJ
TJ WAUDIO
R506 R535 C530R509 R533R534 R532 C531R507
100K 100K100K11K 1K1K 220U 220UX
X X X X X100K X 100K 0
AUDIOSETTING
AUDIO OUTPUT1K=02W 47K=1W
R517
1K
47K
401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
Custom
8 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
R+R-
L+L-
RIGHT_IN
LEFT_IN
HL+
HR+
AUDIO_VOL 3
AUDIO_PD
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GNDAUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GNDAUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
GNDAUDIO_GND
R505 0
R509 100KNC
U501TPA6011
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24PGND
ROUT-
PVDD
RHPIN
RLINEIN
RIN
VDD
LIN
LLINEIN
LHPIN
PVDD
LOUT- PGND
LOUT+
SHUT DOWN
FADE
BYPASS
AGND
SEMAX
SEDIFF
VOLUME
HPLINE
SEBTL
ROUT+
C504 033uF
L503JKMT_B201212K800TM
R501
47k
Q502
2SC2411K
+
C530 220uF10VNC
Q501
MMBT3904B
EC
R504 22K
C505 033uF
C501
01uF
R521 10K1 2
+ C509
22U
R507 11K100K
CN501
PHONEJACK STEREO
2
31
L501JKMT_B201212K800TM
R532
1KNC
CN502
CON-5
12345
12345
R502
47k
R508 100K
R515 100K
+
C531 220uF10VNC
C503 033uF
R533
1KNC
C507
01uF
C506 033uF
R535
NC0
L502 B201210K800TM
R534
100KNC
R522
10K
12
R516
22K
+ C502
470uF63V
R517 1K47K
C510
01uF
R510 100K C511
1uF
R503 24K
R520 01 2
R506 100KNC
CN503
CON-4NC
1234
1234
R51810K
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
DVI CONNECTOR
DIGITALDDC
21
3
BAV99
A7
Componenttop view
All Res and Cap size is 0603The mark to indicate that Part disuse
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV10
100
R206
10KMJ
R232
X
R233
X
TJ X
EDID SETTING
401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
B
7 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
RX0+
RX1+RX1-
RX2+
RXC+
RX2-
RX0-
DDC_SDA_DVIDDC_SCL_DVI
RXC-
DDCWP 3
DVI_CAB
GND
DVI_5V
GND
GND
33V_AVDD
GND
GND
GND
33V_AVDD
GND
DVI_5V+5V
BAV99
D2042
13
D209
BAT54C
1
23
CA1
CA2CC
R20210K
R233NC0
R229 1001
R228 1001
R231 1001
R224 1001
R20610KNC
R230 1001
BAV99
D2052
13
R227 1001
R20310K
U201
24AA02
4
8123
765GND
VCCA0A1A2
WPSCLSDA
D210
Z56V
12
R204 47
C201
01uF
R205 47
BAV99
D2062
13
BAV99
D2022
13BAV99
D2012
13
R232100NC
12
BAV99
D2072
13
CN201
DVI-D
12345678
910111213141516
1718192021222324
34
33 RX2-RX2+GNDRX4-RX4+
SCLSDA
VS
RX1-RX1+GNDRX3-RX3+
5VGND
HP
RX0-RX0+GNDRX5-RX5+GND
RXC+RXC-
Shell
Shell
BAV99
D2082
13
BAV99
D2032
13
R201 10K
R225 1001
C209
01uF
D211
Z56V
12
R226 1001
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
All Res and Cap size is 0603The mark to indicate that Part disuse
FOR MJ SERIAL MODEL ONLY
MJ
TJ WAUDIO
R506 R535 C530R509 R533R534 R532 C531R507
100K 100K100K11K 1K1K 220U 220UX
X X X X X100K X 100K 0
AUDIOSETTING
AUDIO OUTPUT1K=02W 47K=1W
R517
1K
47K
401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
Custom
8 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
R+R-
L+L-
RIGHT_IN
LEFT_IN
HL+
HR+
AUDIO_VOL 3
AUDIO_PD
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GNDAUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GNDAUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
GNDAUDIO_GND
R505 0
R509 100KNC
U501TPA6011
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24PGND
ROUT-
PVDD
RHPIN
RLINEIN
RIN
VDD
LIN
LLINEIN
LHPIN
PVDD
LOUT- PGND
LOUT+
SHUT DOWN
FADE
BYPASS
AGND
SEMAX
SEDIFF
VOLUME
HPLINE
SEBTL
ROUT+
C504 033uF
L503JKMT_B201212K800TM
R501
47k
Q502
2SC2411K
+
C530 220uF10VNC
Q501
MMBT3904B
EC
R504 22K
C505 033uF
C501
01uF
R521 10K1 2
+ C509
22U
R507 11K100K
CN501
PHONEJACK STEREO
2
31
L501JKMT_B201212K800TM
R532
1KNC
CN502
CON-5
12345
12345
R502
47k
R508 100K
R515 100K
+
C531 220uF10VNC
C503 033uF
R533
1KNC
C507
01uF
C506 033uF
R535
NC0
L502 B201210K800TM
R534
100KNC
R522
10K
12
R516
22K
+ C502
470uF63V
R517 1K47K
C510
01uF
R510 100K C511
1uF
R503 24K
R520 01 2
R506 100KNC
CN503
CON-4NC
1234
1234
R51810K
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
PCB Name-Rev VL924 REV1
All Res and Cap size is 0603The mark to indicate that Part disuse
FOR MJ SERIAL MODEL ONLY
MJ
TJ WAUDIO
R506 R535 C530R509 R533R534 R532 C531R507
100K 100K100K11K 1K1K 220U 220UX
X X X X X100K X 100K 0
AUDIOSETTING
AUDIO OUTPUT1K=02W 47K=1W
R517
1K
47K
401ADI 1A
Schematic CTRLB VL-924
Custom
8 8Thursday February 16 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
R+R-
L+L-
RIGHT_IN
LEFT_IN
HL+
HR+
AUDIO_VOL 3
AUDIO_PD
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GNDAUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GNDAUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
V-AUDIO
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
AUDIO_GND
GNDAUDIO_GND
R505 0
R509 100KNC
U501TPA6011
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12 13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24PGND
ROUT-
PVDD
RHPIN
RLINEIN
RIN
VDD
LIN
LLINEIN
LHPIN
PVDD
LOUT- PGND
LOUT+
SHUT DOWN
FADE
BYPASS
AGND
SEMAX
SEDIFF
VOLUME
HPLINE
SEBTL
ROUT+
C504 033uF
L503JKMT_B201212K800TM
R501
47k
Q502
2SC2411K
+
C530 220uF10VNC
Q501
MMBT3904B
EC
R504 22K
C505 033uF
C501
01uF
R521 10K1 2
+ C509
22U
R507 11K100K
CN501
PHONEJACK STEREO
2
31
L501JKMT_B201212K800TM
R532
1KNC
CN502
CON-5
12345
12345
R502
47k
R508 100K
R515 100K
+
C531 220uF10VNC
C503 033uF
R533
1KNC
C507
01uF
C506 033uF
R535
NC0
L502 B201210K800TM
R534
100KNC
R522
10K
12
R516
22K
+ C502
470uF63V
R517 1K47K
C510
01uF
R510 100K C511
1uF
R503 24K
R520 01 2
R506 100KNC
CN503
CON-4NC
1234
1234
R51810K
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
COMPAL ELECTRONICSINC
403ACN
A
KR
1 EMITTER
3BAV99
2 BASE
RK7002
21
SOT-23B
3 COLLECTOR
D
G S
Hua jieSA-4S-215
0A
SCHEMATIC POWER+IB VP-930 LAW998
A2
2 2Tuesday February 14 2006
Title
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
VDD
VDD
VDD
LP1
LP1
VIN
R927 100603
R928100603
C9081uF0805
D806NC
R823NC
C9233920805NPO
Q9102N3904
+ C80682uf400V
12
D805
NC
R901 100603
R9223M12W
R8451K 2W
Q904 P2804BD N-MOS1
3
42
G
S
DD
R9081K0603
C9301U50V0805
R924357K0603 1
R821NC
D802PS104R
C9063330805X7R
C815NC
- +
BD8012KBP06M
3
1
4
2
D801PS1010R
12
C804222 Y1
D804NC
T801EE30
3
1
6
4 9
1011
78
2
7812
R907100K0603 1
C812NC
C92112P3KV
L804 Bead
C903470uF25V
C816NC
J903
12
R9253M12W
C846NC
C813103 X7R0603
Q911ARK7002
2
31
R808NC
C8141031KV
R820NC
R80002 1W FUSE
L842CHOKE
D831ER302
1 2
R849806K0603 1
L841CHOKE
C9073330603
R822NC
D926
BAV99
13
2
R921357K06031
D924
BAV99
13
2
+C843470uf25V
12
R81447K1206
L801CL90000780I
1
3
2
4
R819181206
R816 1K0603
R85251K0603 1
J905
12
C9241020603
D925BAV99
13
2
C808104X7R0603
R9022K0603
R91333K0805
P801
3
2
1
L
N
G
C9283920805NPO
R9111M0805
R8471K0603
U802KA431Z2
3
1
R916100K1206
R915100K1206
C90422U0805
R92339006031
R84410 1W MOF
U800LTV-817M-B
+
C817NC
12
Q8012SK2761I
1
32
TVS1
NC
Q908RK70022
31
D921
BAV99
13
2
C902470uF25V
R810680K1206
F901ANC0603
D841ER502
1 2
R817181206
R81510K0603
C801102 Y1
R9262K06031
+
C8471000uf10V
12
R85047
L805 Bead
D842ER502
1 2
C9275P3KV
D901 SB1401 2
J902
12
Q911DTC124EKA
R818181206
C852224 X7R
R807751206
R809 220805
D902 SB14012
Q903RK70022
31
C904A1040603X7R
C84410205KV
R8513K0603 1
+C845470uf25V
12
C923A270PX7R0603
C928A270PX7R0603
ZD801RLZ15B
C929
1020603
U901 OZ9936
8
7
6
5
1
2
3
4
ISEN
DIM
VDDA
DRV1
SST_CMP
RT
GNDA
DRV2
R80662K1206
C9251U50V0805
C800222 Y1
R806A62K1206
F801T2A250V
C9225P3KV
T901 EEA-225
1
84
67
23
F802T2A250V
ZD802
NC
R90500603
F901NC1206
JP1 JUMPER
R906NC
C905NC
+ C854470uf16V
12
L843CHOKE
D831AER302
1 2
R848402K0603 1
J801JWT B2541WR0
12345678
+C8531000uf10V
12
+
C809100uf50V
12
Q804NC
L806Bead
R811680K1206
Q9012N3904
Q905 P5504ED P-MOS1
3
42
G
S
DD
C8072221KV
R83010 12W FUSE
D922
BAV99
13
2
C803033uf X2
C92612P3KV
C802102 Y1
J904
12
Q909RK70022
31
C901NC
+C848470uf16V
12
R812680K1206
C9094740603
C8301021KV
R9121M0805
R90410K0603
R81310K1206
D923
BAV99
13
2
R801510K1206
U801NCP1200A
3
5
2
1
7
684
CS
DRV
FB
ADJ
NC
VC
C
HV
GN
D
+
C850470uf25V
12
Q9022N3906
R8461500603
R802510K1206
RT801SCK083
R909100K0603
C848A10450V
F803T2A250V
VINV
VBRI
+5V
VINV
VEN
+5V
VBRI
VEN
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
LCD KEY Board Design For AA698
CONTENTS
02 KEYB
Date
REVISION HISTORY
2
Position
SCHEMATIC Name
Approval
SHEET
01 Contents Revision History
Signature
3
PCB Name-Rev VK923-3 Page_1The mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
Ken Lee
Author CommentsDate Ver
Initial Release023032005
23042005 Ken Lee 0A Modify PCBsoutline
10052005 Bob Shy 1 Change PCBs version to 1
404ADF 3A
SCHEMATIC KEYB VK923 LAW998
B
2 3Friday February 10 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
PCB Name-Rev VK923-1 Page_2The mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
Auto Menu Power
S1S2S3S4S5
404ADF 3A
SCHEMATIC KEYB VK923 LAW998
A
3 3Friday February 10 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
GND
LED-YLED-G
KEY-ONOFFKEY-FUN+KEY-VAL-INCKEY-VAL-DECKEY-AUTO
GNDGNDGNDGNDGND GND GND
S2
TACK
12
S3
TACK
12
S5
TACK
12
J1
EampT 4301-0912345678
S1
TACK
12
S4
TACK
12
LED1LED
A1
KA
2
54
55
56
57
Option
58
59
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
D D
C C
B B
A A
PCB Name-Rev VK923-1 Page_2The mark to indicate that Part disuseAll Res and Cap size is 0603
Auto Menu Power
S1S2S3S4S5
404ADF 3A
SCHEMATIC KEYB VK923 LAW998
A
3 3Friday February 10 2006
COMPAL ELECTRONICS INCTitle
Size Document Number Rev
Date Sheet of
GND
LED-YLED-G
KEY-ONOFFKEY-FUN+KEY-VAL-INCKEY-VAL-DECKEY-AUTO
GNDGNDGNDGNDGND GND GND
S2
TACK
12
S3
TACK
12
S5
TACK
12
J1
EampT 4301-0912345678
S1
TACK
12
S4
TACK
12
LED1LED
A1
KA
2
54
55
56
57
Option
58
59
54
55
56
57
Option
58
59
55
56
57
Option
58
59
56
57
Option
58
59
57
Option
58
59
Option
58
59
59